En FW 800StdPrg RevC

ACS 800
Firmware Manual
ACS 800 Standard Application Program 7.x
ACS 800 Standard Application Program 7.x
Firmware Manual
3AFE 64527592 REV C
EN
EFFECTIVE: 20.7.2002
2002 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.
Table of Contents
5
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction to the manual
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Start-up; and control through the I/O
How to start-up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
How to perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
How to control the drive through the I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
How to perform the ID Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ID Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Control panel
Overview of the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Panel operation mode keys and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Status row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Drive control with the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
How to start, stop and change direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
How to set speed reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Actual signal display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
How to select actual signals to the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
How to display the full name of the actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
How to view and reset the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
How to display and reset an active fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
About the fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
How to select a parameter and change the value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Function mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
How to enter an assistant, browse and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
How to upload data from a drive to the panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
How to download data from the panel to a drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
How to set the contrast of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Drive selection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table of Contents
6
How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Program features
Start-up Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
The default order of the tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
List of tasks and the relevant drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Contents of the assistant displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Block diagram: reference source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Reference types and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Reference trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Programmable analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Update cycles in the Standard Application Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Programmable analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Programmable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Automatic Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DC Magnetising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Table of Contents
7
DC Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Flux Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Flux Optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Critical speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Scalar control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Hexagonal motor flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
AI<Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Panel Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Motor Thermal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Motor temperature thermal model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Use of the motor thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Stall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Underload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Motor Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Earth Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Supervision of optional IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Preprogrammed Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DC overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DC undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table of Contents
8
Drive temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Input phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Overfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Internal fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Automatic resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Supervisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Sleep function for the process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Motor temperature measurement through the analogue I/O extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Adaptive Programming using the function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Control of a mechanical brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Operation time scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
State shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Master/Follower use of several drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Settings and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Application macros
Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Factory macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Default control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
PID Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Table of Contents
9
Torque Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Sequential Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Operation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
User macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Actual signals and parameters
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
10 START/STOP/DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
16 SYSTEM CTRL INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
23 SPEED CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
24 TORQUE CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
26 MOTOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
27 BRAKE CHOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
31 AUTOMATIC RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
32 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
33 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
34 PROCESS VARIABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
35 MOT TEMP MEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
40 PID CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
42 BRAKE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
50 ENCODER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
51 COMM MOD DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
52 STANDARD MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
60 MASTER/FOLLOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
70 DDCS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
85 USER CONSTANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
90 D SET REC ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
92 D SET TR ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
96 EXTERNAL AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Table of Contents
10
98 OPTION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fault tracing
Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Warning and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Warning messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Warning messages generated by the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Fieldbus control
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Control through the Standard Modbus Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Communication set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Modbus addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Setting up an Advant Fieldbus 100 (AF 100) connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Optical component types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Communication Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
The fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fieldbus reference selection and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used . 202
Block diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter is used 203
Block diagram: Control data input from fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used . 204
Block Diagram: Actual value selection for fieldbus when a type Nxxx fieldbus adapter is used 205
Communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
ABB Drives communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Generic Drive communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Speed reference and actual speed scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Diverse status, fault, alarm and limit words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Analogue Extension Module
Speed control through the analogue extension module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Basic checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Table of Contents
11
Settings of the analogue extension module and the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Parameter settings: bipolar input in basic speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Parameter settings: bipolar input in joystick mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Additional data: actual signals and parameters
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Profibus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Modbus and Modbus Plus address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Interbus-S address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Control block diagrams
Reference control chain, sheet 1: FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL and T CTRL macros (contin-
ued on the next page ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Reference control chain sheet 1: PID CTRL macro (continued on the next page ) . . . . . . . . . . 242
Reference control chain sheet 2: All macros (continued on the next page ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable and Start Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Handling of Reset and On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Table of Contents
12
13
Chapter overview
The chapter includes a description of the contents of the manual. In addition it
contains information about the compatibility, safety, intended audience, and related
publications.
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with ACS 800 Standard Application Program 7.x.
Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive.
Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use
the drive. The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the
Hardware Manual.
Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the
default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes are
given in this manual in the subsection describing the related user-adjustable
parameters.
Reader
The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring
practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.
Contents
The manual consists of the following chapters:
Start-up; and control through the I/O instructs in setting up the application
program, and how to start, stop and regulate the speed of the drive.
Control panel gives instructions for using the panel.
Program features contains the feature descriptions and the reference lists of the
user settings and diagnostic signals.
Application macros contains a short description of each macro together with a
connection diagram.
Actual signals and parameters describes the actual signals and parameters of the
drive.
Fault tracing lists the warning and fault messages with the possible causes and
remedies.
14
Fieldbus control describes the communication through the serial communication
links.
Analogue Extension Module, describes the communication between the drive and
the analogue I/O extension (optional).
Additional data: actual signals and parameters contains more information on the
actual signals and parameters.
15
Chapter overview
The chapter instructs how to:
do the start-up
start, stop, change the direction of rotation, and adjust the speed of the motor
through the I/O interface
perform an Identification Run for the drive.
How to start-up the drive
There are two start-up methods between which the user can select: Run the Start-up
Assistant, or perform a limited start-up. The Assistant guides the user through all
essential settings to be done. In the limited start-up, the drive gives no guidance:
The user goes through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in
the manual.
If you want to run the Assistant, follow the instructions given in the subsection
How to perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings).
If you want to perform the limited start-up, follow the instructions given in the
subsection How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings).
How to perform the guided start-up (covers all essential settings)
Before you start, ensure you have the motor nameplate data on hand.
SAFETY
The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the
appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions.
Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation
manual.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
- there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
- a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. (ID Run is essential only
in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.)
POWER-UP
Apply mains power. The control panel first shows the panel
identification data
CDP312 PANEL Vx.xx
.......
16
then the Identification Display of the drive
ACS800 xx kW
ID NUMBER 1
then the Actual Signal Display
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
after which the display suggests starting the Language Selection.
(If no key is pressed for a few seconds, the display starts to alternate between the
Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on selecting the language.)
The drive is now ready for the start-up.
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
*** INFORMATION ***
Press FUNC to start
Language Selection
SELECTING THE LANGUAGE
Press the FUNC key.
Language Selection 1/1
LANGUAGE ?
[ENGLISH]
ENTER:OK ACT:EXIT
Scroll to the desired language by the arrow keys ( or ) and
press ENTER to accept.
(The drive loads the selected language into use, shifts back to the Actual Signal
Display and starts to alternate between the Actual Signal Display and the
suggestion on starting the guided motor set-up.)
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
*** INFORMATION ***
Press FUNC to start
guided Motor Setup
STARTING THE GUIDED MOTOR SET-UP
Press FUNC to start the guided motor set-up.
(The display shows which general command keys to use when stepping through
the assistant.)
Motor Setup 1/10
ENTER: Ok/Continue
ACT: Exit
FUNC: More Info
Press ENTER to step forward.
Follow the instructions given on the display.
Motor Setup 2/10
MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA
AVAILABLE?
ENTER:Yes FUNC:Info
17
How to perform the limited start-up (covers only the basic settings)
Before you start, ensure you have the motor nameplate data at your hand.
SAFETY
The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
The safety instructions must be followed during the start-up procedure. See the
appropriate hardware manual for safety instructions.
Check the installation. See the installation checklist in the appropriate hardware/installation
manual.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
- there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
- a Standard ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. (ID Run is essential
only in applications which require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.)
POWER-UP
Apply mains power. The control panel first shows the panel
identification data
CDP312 PANEL Vx.xx
.......
then the Identification Display of the drive
ACS800 xx kW
ID NUMBER 1
then the Actual Signal Display
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
after which the display suggests starting the Language Selection.
(If no key is pressed for a few seconds, the display starts to alternate between the
Actual Signal Display and the suggestion on starting the Language Selection.)
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
*** INFORMATION ***
Press FUNC to start
Language Selection
Press ACT to remove the suggestion on starting the language
selection.
The drive is now ready for the limited start-up.
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
MANUAL START-UP DATA ENTERING (parameter group 99)
Select the language. The general parameter setting procedure is
described below.
The general parameter setting procedure:
- Press PAR to select the Parameter Mode of the panel.
- Press the double-arrow keys ( or ) to scroll the parameter groups.
- Press the arrow keys ( or ) to scroll parameters within a group.
- Activate the setting of a new value by ENTER.
- Change the value by the arrow keys ( or ), fast change by the double-
arrow keys ( or ).
- Press ENTER to accept the new value (brackets disappear).
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
01 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
01 LANGUAGE
[ENGLISH]
18
Select the Application Macro. The general parameter setting
procedure is given above.
The default value FACTORY is suitable in most cases.
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
02 APPLICATION MACRO
[ ]
Select the motor control mode. The general parameter setting
procedure is given above.
DTC is suitable in most cases. The SCALAR control mode is recommended
- for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is
variable
- when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal current of
the inverter
- when the inverter is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
04 MOTOR CTRL MODE
[DTC]
Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate:
Note: Set the motor data to
exactly the same value as
on the motor nameplate.
For example, if the motor
nominal speed is 1440 rpm
on the nameplate, setting
the value of parameter
99.08 MOTOR NOM
SPEED to 1500 rpm
results in the wrong
operation of the drive.
- motor nominal voltage
Allowed range: 1/2 U
N
2 U
N
of ACS800. (U
N
refers to the highest voltage in
each of the nominal voltage ranges: 415 VAC for 400 VAC units, 500 VAC for 500
VAC units and 690 VAC for 600 VAC units.)
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE
[ ]
- motor nominal current
Allowed range: approx. 1/6 I
2hd
2 I
2hd
of ACS800
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT
[ ]
- motor nominal frequency
Range: 8 300 Hz
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
07 MOTOR NOM FREQ
[ ]
- motor nominal speed
Range: 1 18000 rpm
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
08 MOTOR NOM SPEED
[ ]
-motor nominal power
Range: 0 9000 kW
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
09 MOTOR NOM POWER
[ ]
M2AA 200 MLA 4
1475
1475
1470
1470
1475
1770
32.5
56
34
59
54
59
0.83
0.83
0.83
0.83
0.83
0.83
3GAA 202 001 - ADA
180
IEC 34-1
6210/C3 6312/C3
Cat. no
35
30
30
30
30
30 50
50
50
50
50
60
690 Y
400 D
660 Y
380 D
415 D
440 D
V
Hz kW r/min A cos IA/IN
t
E/s
Ins.cl. F IP 55
No
IEC 200 M/L 55
3 motor
ABB Motors
380 V
mains
voltage
19
When the motor data has been entered, a warning appears. It
indicates that the motor parameters have been set, and the drive is
ready to start the motor identification (ID Magnetisation or ID Run).
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
** WARNING **
ID MAGN REQ
Select the motor identification method.
The default value ID MAGN (ID Magnetisation) is suitable for most applications. It
is applied in this basic start-up procedure.
The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) should be selected instead if:
- The operation point is near zero speed, and/or
- Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed
range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
For more information, see the subsection How to perform the ID Run below.
1 -> 0.0 rpm O
99 START-UP DATA
10 MOTOR ID RUN
[ID MAGN]
IDENTIFICATION MAGNETISATION (with Motor ID Run selection ID MAGN)
Press the LOC/REM key to change to local control (L shown on the
first row).
Press the to start the Identification Magnetisation. The motor is
magnetised at zero speed for 20 to 60 s. Two warnings are
displayed:
The upper warning is displayed while the magnetisation is on.
The lower warning is displayed after the magnetisation is
completed.
1 L-> 0.0 rpm I
** WARNING **
ID MAGN
1 L-> 0.0 rpm O
** WARNING **
ID DONE
DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR
Check the direction of rotation of the motor.
- Press ACT to get the status row visible.
- Increase the speed reference from zero to a small value by
pressing REF and then the arrow keys ( , , or ).
- Press to start the motor.
- Check that the motor is running in the desired direction.
- Stop the motor by pressing .
1 L->[xxx] rpm I
FREQ xxx Hz
CURRENT xx A
POWER xx %
To change the direction of rotation of the motor:
- Disconnect mains power from the drive, and wait 5 minutes for the
intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge. Measure the voltage
between each input terminal (U1, V1 and W1) and earth with a
multimeter to ensure that the frequency converter is discharged.
- Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the
motor terminals or at the motor connection box.
- Verify your work by applying mains power and repeating the check
as described above.
SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES
Set the minimum speed.
1 L-> 0.0 rpm O
20 LIMITS
01 MINIMUM SPEED
[ ]
forward
direction
reverse
direction
20
Set the maximum speed.
1 L-> 0.0 rpm O
20 LIMITS
02 MAXIMUM SPEED
[ ]
Set the acceleration time 1.
Note: Check also acceleration time 2, if two acceleration times will
be used in the application.
1 L-> 0.0 rpm O
22 ACCEL/DECEL
02 ACCELER TIME 1
[ ]
Set the deceleration time 1.
Note: Set also deceleration time 2, if two deceleration times will be
used in the application.
1 L-> 0.0 rpm O
22 ACCEL/DECEL
03 DECELER TIME 1
[ ]
The drive is now ready for use.
21
How to control the drive through the I/O interface
The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analogue
inputs, when:
the motor start-up is performed, and
the default (factory) parameter settings are valid.
PRELIMINARY SETTINGS
Ensure the Factory macro is active.
See parameter 99.02.
If you need to change the direction of rotation, change the setting of
parameter 10.03 to REQUEST.
Ensure the control connections are wired according to the connection
diagram given for the Factory macro.
See the chapter Application
macros.
Ensure the drive is in external control mode. Press the LOC/REM key to
change between external and local control.
In External control, there is
no L visible on the first row
of the panel display.
STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR
Start by switching digital input DI1 on.
1 -> 0.0 rpm I
FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
Regulate the speed by adjusting the voltage of analogue input AI1.
1 -> 500.0 rpm I
FREQ 16.66 Hz
CURRENT 12.66 A
POWER 8.33 %
CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR
Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off.
1 -> 500.0 rpm I
FREQ 16.66 Hz
CURRENT 12.66 A
POWER 8.33 %
Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on.
1 <- 500.0 rpm I
FREQ 16.66 Hz
CURRENT 12.66 A
POWER 8.33 %
STOPPING THE MOTOR
Switch off digital input DI1.
1 -> 500.0 rpm O
FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
22
How to perform the ID Run
The drive performs the ID Magnetisation automatically at the first start. In most
applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run. The ID Run (Standard or
Reduced) should be selected if:
The operation point is near zero speed, and/or
Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide speed
range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
The Reduced ID Run is to be performed instead of the Standard if it is not possible to
disengage the driven machine from the motor.
ID Run Procedure
Note: If parameter values (Group 10 to 98) are changed before the ID Run, check
that the new settings meet the following conditions:
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED < 0 rpm
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of motor rated speed
20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT > 100% I
hd
20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE > 50%
Ensure that the panel is in the local control mode (L displayed on the status row).
Press the LOC/REM key to switch between modes.
Change the ID Run selection to STANDARD or REDUCED.
Press ENTER to verify selection. The following message will be displayed:
To start the ID Run, press the key. The Run Enable signal must be active
(see parameter 16.01 RUN ENABLE).
Warning when the ID Run is
started
Warning during the ID Run Warning after a successfully
completed ID Run
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
ACS800 55 kW
**WARNING**
MOTOR STARTS
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
ACS800 55 kW
**WARNING**
ID RUN
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
ACS800 55 kW
**WARNING**
ID DONE
99 START-UP DATA
10 MOTOR ID RUN
[STANDARD]
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
ACS800 55 kW
**WARNING**
ID RUN SEL
23
In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID run.
However:
The Motor ID Run can be stopped at any time by pressing the control panel stop
key ( ).
After the ID Run is started with the start key ( ), it is possible to monitor the
actual values by first pressing the ACT key and then a double-arrow key ( ).
24
Control panel
25
Control panel
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how to use the control panel CDP 312 or CDP 312R.
The same control panel is used with all ACS 800 series drives, so the instructions
given apply to all ACS 800 types. The display examples shown are based on the
Standard Application Program; displays produced by other application programs
may differ slightly.
Overview of the panel

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
ACT PAR FUNC DRIVE
ENTER
LOC RESET REF
REM
I 0
1 3 6 7
5 2 4
The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters.
The language is selected at start-up (parameter 99.01).
The control panel has four operation modes:
- Actual Signal Display Mode (ACT key)
- Parameter Mode (PAR key)
- Function Mode (FUNC key)
- Drive Selection Mode (DRIVE key)
The use of single arrow keys, double arrow keys and
ENTER depend on the operation mode of the panel.
The drive control keys are:
No. Use
1 Start
2 Stop
3 Activate reference setting
4 Forward direction of rotation
5 Reverse direction of rotation
6 Fault reset
7 Change between Local / Remote (external)
control
Control panel
26
Panel operation mode keys and displays
The figure below shows the mode selection keys of the panel, and the basic
operations and displays in each mode.
Status row
The figure below describes the status row digits.
Parameter Mode
Function Mode
Drive Selection Mode
Act. signal / Fault history
Enter selection mode
Accept new signal
Group selection
Parameter selection
Enter change mode
Accept new value
Fast value change
Slow value change
Function start
Drive selection
Enter change mode
Accept new value
Actual Signal Display Mode
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
selection
ID number change
Status row
Status row
ACT
PAR
FUNC
DRIVE
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
10 START/STOP/DIR
01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR
DI1,2
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
ACS 800 75 kW
ASAA7000 / xxxxxx
ID NUMBER 1
Act. signal / Fault message
scrolling
Actual signal names
and values
Parameter group
Parameter
Parameter value
Status row
List of functions
Device type
SW version / application
version and ID number
Row selection
Page selection
Drive ID number
Drive control status
L = Local control
R = Remote control
= External control
Drive status
I = Running
O = Stopped
= Run disabled
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
Direction of rotation
-> = Forward
<- = Reverse
Drive reference
Control panel
27
Drive control with the panel
The user can control the drive with the panel as follows:
start, stop, and change direction of the motor
give the motor speed reference or torque reference
give a process reference (when the process PID control is active)
reset the fault and warning messages
change between local and external drive control.
The panel can be used for control of the drive control always when the drive is under
local control and the status row is visible on the display.
How to start, stop and change direction
Step Action Press Key Display
1. To show the status row. 1 ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
2. To switch to local control.
(only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L
on the first row of the display.)
1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
3. To stop 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
4. To start 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
5. To change the direction to reverse. 1 L <-1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
6. To change the direction to forward. 1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
ACT PAR
FUNC
LOC
REM
0
I
Control panel
28
How to set speed reference
1. To show the status row. 1 ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
2. To switch to local control.
(Only if the drive is not under local control, i.e. there is no L
on the first row of the display.)
1 L ->1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
3. To enter the Reference Setting function. 1 L ->[1242.0 rpm]I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
4. To change the reference.
(slow change)
(fast change)
1 L ->[1325.0 rpm]I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
5. To save the reference.
(The value is stored in the permanent memory; it is
restored automatically after power switch-off.)
1 L -> 1325.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
ACT PAR
FUNC
LOC
REM
REF
ENTER
Control panel
29
Actual signal display mode
In the Actual Signal Display Mode, the user can:
show three actual signals on the display at a time
select the actual signals to display
view the fault history
reset the fault history.
The panel enters the Actual Signal Display Mode when the user presses the ACT
key, or if he does not press any key within one minute.
How to select actual signals to the display
Step Action Press key Display
1. To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
2. To select a row (a blinking cursor indicates the selected
row).
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
3. To enter the actual signal selection function. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
04 CURRENT
80.00 A
4. To select an actual signal.
To change the actual signal group.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
05 TORQUE 70.00 %
5.a To accept the selection and to return to the Actual Signal
Display Mode.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
TORQUE 70.00 %
POWER 75.00 %
5.b To cancel the selection and keep the original selection.
The selected keypad mode is entered.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
ACT
ENTER
ENTER
ACT
FUNC DRIVE
PAR
Control panel
30
How to display the full name of the actual signals
How to view and reset the fault history
Note: The fault history cannot be reset if there are active faults or warnings.
1. To display the full name of the three actual signals. Hold 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQUENCY
CURRENT
POWER
2. To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode. Release 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
1. To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
2. To enter the Fault History Display. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
1 LAST FAULT
+OVERCURRENT
6451 H 21 MIN 23 S
3. To select the previous (UP) or the next fault/warning
(DOWN).
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
2 LAST FAULT
+OVERVOLTAGE
1121 H 1 MIN 23 S
To clear the Fault History. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
2 LAST FAULT
H MIN S
4. To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
ACT
ACT
ACT
RESET
Control panel
31
How to display and reset an active fault
WARNING! If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the
drive will start immediately after fault reset. If the cause of the fault has not been
removed, the drive will trip again.
About the fault history
The fault history restores information on the latest events (faults, warnings and
resets) of the drive. The table below shows how the events are stored in the fault
history.
1. To display an active fault. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm
ACS 801 75 kW
** FAULT **
ACS800 TEMP
2. To reset the fault. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
ACT
RESET
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
2 LAST FAULT
+DC OVERVOLT (3210)
1121 H 1 MIN 23 S
Event Information on display
Drive detects a fault and
generates a fault message
Sequential number of the event and
LAST FAULT text.
Name of the fault and a + sign in front
of the name.
Total power-on time.
User resets the fault message. Sequential number of the event and
LAST FAULT text.
-RESET FAULT text.
Drive generates a warning
message.
LAST WARNING text.
Name of the warning and a + sign in
front of the name.
Drive deactivates the warning
message.
LAST WARNING text.
Name of the warning and a - sign in
front of the name.
Sequential number
(1 is the most recent event)
Sign
Power-
on time
Name and
code
A Fault History View
Control panel
32
Parameter mode
In the Parameter Mode, the user can:
view the parameter values
change the parameter settings.
The panel enters the Parameter Mode when the user presses the PAR key.
How to select a parameter and change the value
1. To enter the Parameter Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
10 START/STOP/DIR
01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR
DI1,2
2. To select a group. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
01 KEYPAD REF SEL
REF1 (rpm)
3. To select a parameter within a group. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
AI1
4. To enter the parameter setting function. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
[AI1]
5. To change the parameter value.
- (slow change for numbers and text)
- (fast change for numbers only)
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
[AI2]
6a. To save the new value. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
AI2
6b. To cancel the new setting and keep the original value,
press any of the mode selection keys.
The selected mode is entered.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
11 REFERENCE SELECT
03 EXT REF1 SELECT
AI1
PAR
ENTER
ENTER
ACT
FUNC DRIVE
PAR
Control panel
33
How to adjust a source selection (pointer) parameter
Most parameters define values that are used directly in the drive application
program. Source selection (pointer) parameters are exceptions: They point to the
value of another parameter. The parameter setting procedure differs somewhat that
of the other parameters.
1)
Note: Instead of pointing to another parameter, it is also possible to define a
constant by the source selection parameter. Proceed as follows:
- Change the inversion field to C. The appearance of the row changes. The rest of
the line is now a constant setting field.
- Give the constant value to the constant setting field.
- Press Enter to accept.
1. See the table above to
- enter the Parameter Mode
- select the correct parameter group and parameter
- enter the parameter setting mode
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[000.000.00]
2. To scroll between the inversion, group, index and bit
fields.
1)
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[000.000.00]
3. To adjust the value of a field. 1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[000.018.00]
4. To accept the value.
PAR
ENTER
ENTER
1 L ->1242.0 rpm O
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
06 INPUT1
[001.018.00]
Inversion field
Group field
Index field
Bit field
Inversion field inverts the selected parameter
value. Plus sign (+): no inversion, minus (-) sign:
inversion.
Bit field selects the bit number (relevant only if the
parameter value is a packed boolean word).
Index field selects the parameter index.
Group field selects the parameter group.
Control panel
34
Function mode
In the Function Mode, the user can:
start a guided procedure for adjusting the drive settings (assistants)
upload the drive parameter values and motor data from the drive to the panel.
download group 1 to 97 parameter values from the panel to the drive.
1)
adjust the contrast of the display.
The panel enters the Function Mode when the user presses the FUNC key.
1)
The parameter groups 98, 99 and the results of the motor identification are not included by default. The restriction
prevents downloading of unfit motor data. In special cases it is , however, possible to download all. For more information,
please contact your local ABB representative.
Control panel
35
How to enter an assistant, browse and exit
The table below shows the operation of the basic keys which lead the user through
an assistant. The Motor Setup task of the Start-up Assistant is used as an example.
1. To enter the Function Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
2. To select a task or function from the list (a flashing cursor
indicates the selection).
Double arrows: To change page to see more assistants/
functions.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT 1
3. To enter the task. Motor Setup 1/10
ENTER: Ok/Continue
ACT: Exit
FUNC: More Info
4. To accept and continue. Motor Setup 2/10
MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA
AVAILABLE?
ENTER:Yes FUNC:Info
5. To accept and continue. Motor Setup 3/10
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[0 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
6. a. To adjust the requested drive parameter. Motor Setup 3/10
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[415 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:back
b. To ask for information on the requested value.
(To scroll the information displays
and return to the task).
INFO P99.05
Set as given on the
motor nameplate.
7. a. To accept a value and step forward. Motor Setup 4/10
MOTOR NOM CURRENT?
[0.0 A]
ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
b. To cancel the setting and take one step back. Motor Setup 3/10
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[415 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:back
8. To cancel and exit.
Note: 1 x ACT returns to the first display of the task.
1 L -> 0.0 rpm O
FREQ 0.00 Hz
CURRENT 0.00 A
POWER 0.00 %
FUNC
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
) (
FUNC, ACT
FUNC
ENTER
RESET
2 x ACT
Control panel
36
How to upload data from a drive to the panel
Note:
Upload before downloading.
Ensure the program versions of the destination drive are the same as the
versions of the source drive, see parameters 33.01 and 33.02.
Before removing the panel from a drive, ensure the panel is in remote operating
mode (change with the LOC/REM key).
Stop the drive before downloading.
Before upload, repeat the following steps in each drive:
Setup the motors.
Activate the communication to the optional equipment. (See parameter group 98
OPTION MODULES.)
Before upload, do the following in the drive from which the copies are to be taken:
Set the parameters in groups 10 to 97 as preferred.
Proceed to the upload sequence (below).
1. Enter the Function Mode. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
2. Enter the page that contains the upload, download and
contrast functions.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
3. Select the upload function (a flashing cursor indicates the
selected function).
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
4. Enter the upload function. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
5. Switch to external control.
(No L on the first row of the display.)
1 -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
6. Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the drive into
which the data will be downloaded.
FUNC
ENTER
LOC
REM
Control panel
37
How to download data from the panel to a drive
Consider the notes in section How to upload data from a drive to the panel above.
1. Connect the panel containing the uploaded data to the
drive.
2. Ensure the drive is in local control (L shown on the first row
of the display). If necessary, press the LOC/REM key to
change to local control.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
contrast functions.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
5. Select the download function (a flashing cursor indicates
the selected function).
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
6. Start the download. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
DOWNLOAD =>=>
LOC
REM
FUNC
ENTER
Control panel
38
How to set the contrast of the display
Motor Setup
Application Macro
Speed Control EXT1
contrast functions.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
3. Select a function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected
function).
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 4
4. Enter the contrast setting function. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
CONTRAST [4]
5. Adjust the contrast. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm
CONTRAST [6]
6.a Accept the selected value. 1 L -> 1242.0 rpm O
UPLOAD <=<=
DOWNLOAD =>=>
CONTRAST 6
6.b Cancel the new setting and retain the original value by
pressing any of the mode selection keys.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
FUNC
ENTER
ENTER
ACT
FUNC DRIVE
PAR
Control panel
39
Drive selection mode
In normal use the features available in the Drive Selection Mode are not needed; the
features are reserved for applications where several drives are connected to one
panel link. (For more information, see the Installation and Start-up Guide for the
Panel Bus Connection Interface Module, NBCI, Code: 3AFY 58919748 [English]).
In the Drive Selection Mode, the user can:
Select the drive with which the panel communicates through the panel link.
Change the identification number of a drive connected to the panel link.
View the status of the drives connected on the panel link.
The panel enters the Drive Selection Mode when the user presses the DRIVE key.
Each on-line station must have an individual identification number (ID). By default,
the ID number of the drive is 1.
Note: The default ID number setting of the drive should not be changed unless the
drive is to be connected to the panel link with other drives on-line.
How to select a drive and change its panel link ID number
Step Action Press key
Display
1. To enter the Drive Selection Mode. ACS800 75 kW
ASAAA5000 xxxxxx
ID NUMBER 1
2. To select the next drive/view.
The ID number of the station is changed by first pressing
ENTER (the brackets round the ID number appear) and
then adjusting the value with arrow buttons. The new value
is accepted with ENTER. The power of the drive must be
switched off to validate its new ID number setting.
ACS800 75 kW
ASAAA5000 xxxxxx
ID NUMBER 1
The status display of all devices connected to the Panel
Link is shown after the last individual station. If all stations
do not fit on the display at once, press the double-arrow up
to view the rest of them.
Status Display Symbols:
= Drive stopped, direction
forward
= Drive running, direction
reverse
F = Drive tripped on a fault
3. To connect to the last displayed drive and to enter another
mode, press one of the mode selection keys.
1 L -> 1242.0 rpm I
FREQ 45.00 Hz
CURRENT 80.00 A
POWER 75.00 %
DRIVE
1o
o
PAR
FUNC
ACT
Control panel
40
Reading and entering packed boolean values on the display
Some actual values and parameters are packed boolean, i.e. each individual bit has
a defined meaning (explained at the corresponding signal or parameter). On the
control panel, packed boolean values are read and entered in hexadecimal format.
In this example, bits 1, 3 and 4 of the packed boolean value are ON:
Boolean 0000 0000 0001 1010
Hex 0 0 1 A
Bit 15 Bit 0
Program features
41
Program features
Chapter overview
The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related
user settings, actual signals, and fault and warning messages.
Start-up Assistant
Introduction
The assistant guides the user through the start-up procedure, helping the user to
feed the requested data (parameter values) to the drive. The assistant also check
that the entered values are valid, i.e. within the allowed range. At the first start, the
drive suggests entering the first task of the assistant, Language Select,
automatically.
The Start-up Assistant is divided into tasks. The user may activate the tasks either
one after the other as the Start-up Assistant suggests, or independently. The user
may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the
assistant at all.
See the chapter Control panel on how to start the assistant, browse and exit.
The default order of the tasks
Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 99.02), the
Start-up Assistant decide which consequent tasks it suggests. The default tasks are
shown in the table below.
Application
Selection
Default Tasks
FACTORY, SEQ
CTRL
Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Speed Control EXT1, Start/Stop
Control, Protections, Output Signals
HAND/AUTO Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Speed Control EXT2, Start/Stop
Control, Speed Control 1, Protections, Output Signals
T CTRL Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, Torque Control, Start/Stop Control,
Speed Control EXT1, Protections, Output Signals
PID CTRL Language Select, Motor Set-up, Application, Option Modules, PID Control, Start/Stop Control, Speed
Control EXT1, Protections, Output Signals
Program features
42
List of tasks and the relevant drive parameters
Name Description Set Parameters
Language Select Selecting the language 99.01
Motor Set-up Setting the motor data
Performing the motor identification. (If the speed limits are not in
the allowed range: Setting the limits).
99.05, 99.06, 99.09, 99.07, 99.08,
99.04
99.10 (20.8, 20.07)
Application Selecting the application macro 99.02, parameters associated to
the macro
Option Modules Activating the option modules Group 98, 35, 52
Speed Control
EXT1
Selecting the source for the speed reference 11.03
(If AI1 is used: Setting analogue input AI1 limits, scale,
inversion)
(13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
13.05, 30.01)
Setting the reference limits 11.04, 11.05
Setting the speed (frequency) limits 20.02, 20.01, (20.08, 20.07)
Setting acceleration and deceleration times 22.02, 22.03
(Setting up the brake chopper if activated by parameter 27.01) (Group 27, 20.05, 14.01)
(If 99.02 is not SEQ CTRL: Setting constant speeds) (Group 12)
Speed Control
EXT2
Setting the source for the speed reference 11.06
inversion)
(13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
13.05, 30.01)
Torque Control Selecting the source for the torque reference 11.06
inversion)
(13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
13.05, 30.01)
Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times 24.01, 24.02
PID Control Selecting the source for the process reference 11.06
inversion)
(13.01, 13.02, 13.03, 13.04,
13.05, 30.01)
Setting the speed (reference) limits 20.02, 20.01 (20.08, 20.07)
Setting the source and limits for the process actual value 40.07, 40.09, 40.10
Start/Stop Control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external
control locations, EXT1 and EXT2
10.01, 10.02
Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 11.02
Defining the direction control 10.03
Defining the start and stop modes 21.01, 21.02, 21.03
Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 16.01, 21.07
Setting the ramp time for the Run Enable function 22.07
Protections Setting the torque and current limits 20.03, 20.04
Output Signals Selecting the signals indicated through the relay outputs RO1,
RO2, RO3 and optional ROs (if installed)
Group 14
Selecting the signals indicated through the analogue output
AO1, AO2 and optional AOs (if installed). Setting the minimum,
maximum, scaling and inversion.
15.01, 15.02, 15.03, 15.04, 15.05,
(Group 96)
Program features
43
Contents of the assistant displays
There are two types of displays in the Start-up Assistant: The main displays and the
information displays. The main displays prompt the user to feed in information or
answer a question. The assistant steps through the main displays. The information
displays contain help texts for the main displays. The figure below shows a typical
example of both and explanations of the contents.
Local control vs. external control
The drive can receive start, stop and direction commands and reference values from
the control panel or through digital and analogue inputs. An optional fieldbus adapter
enables control over an open fieldbus link. A PC equipped with DriveWindow can
also control the drive.
Main Display Information Display
1
2
3
4
Motor Setup 3/10
MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE?
[0 V]
ENTER:Ok RESET:Back
INFO P99.05
Set as given on the motor
nameplate.
1 Name of the assistant, step
number / total number of steps
Text INFO, index of parameter to
be set
2 Request/question Help text
3 Feed-in field help text continue
4 Commands: accept value and
step forward or cancel and step
backwards
double arrow symbol (indicates
that the text continues)
Slot 1
AF 100 Interface
CH0
(DDCS)
Fieldbus
ACS800
RDCO
Board
Control panel
DriveWindow
External Control Local Control
Standard I/O
Slot 1 or Slot 2
Optional I/O
(Advant fieldbus
connection only)
Adapter
Module
CH3
(DDCS)
Program features
44
Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in
local control. L indicates local control on the panel display.
The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in
local mode.
External control
When the drive is in external control, the commands are given through the standard
I/O terminals (digital and analogue inputs), optional I/O extension modules and/or
the fieldbus interface. In addition, it is also possible to set the control panel as the
source for the external control.
External control is indicated by a blank on the panel display or with an R in those
special cases when the panel is defined as a source for external control.
The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations, EXT1 or
EXT2. Depending on the user selection, either one is active at a time.
Settings
Diagnostics
Panel key Additional information
LOC/REM Selection between local and external control
Parameter
11.02 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2
10.01 Start, stop, direction source for EXT1
11.03 Reference source for EXT1
10.02 Start, stop, direction source for EXT2
11.06 Reference source for EXT2
Group 98 OPTION
MODULES
Activation of the optional I/O and serial communication
Actual signals Additional information
01.11, 01.12 EXT1 reference, EXT2 reference
03.02 EXT1/EXT2 selection bit in a packed boolean word
1 L ->1242 rpm I
External Control through the Input/
Output terminals, or through the
fieldbus interfaces
1 R ->1242 rpm I 1 ->1242 rpm I
External Control by control panel
Program features
45
Block diagram: start, stop, direction source for EXT1
The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start, stop, and
direction for external control location EXT1.
Block diagram: reference source for EXT1
The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed
reference of external control location EXT1.
DI1 / Std IO
Fb. selection
See the chapter
Fieldbus control.
Fieldbus adapter slot 1
KEYPAD
EXT1
DI6 / Std IO
DI1 / DIO ext 1
DI2 / DIO ext 1
DI1 / DIO ext 2
DI2 / DIO ext 2
I/O Extensions
See group 98
OPTION
MODULES.
DI7 to DI9
COMM.
CW
DI1
DI6
Control panel
Start/stop/
DI1 / Std IO = Digital input DI1 on the standard I/O terminal block
DI1 / DIO ext 1 = Digital input DI1 on the digital I/O extension module 1
direction
10.01
Select
CH0 / RDCO board
Standard ModBus Link
EXT1
AI1 / Std IO
AI1 / AIO ext
AI2 / AIO ext
11.03
Select
DI1 / DIO ext 3
DI2 / DIO ext 3
KEYPAD
COMM.
REF
Control panel
I/O Extensions
See parameter
group 98 OPTION
MODULES.
AI2 / Std IO
AI3 / Std IO
DI3 / Std IO
DI4 / Std IO
AI1, AI2, AI3, DI3, DI4
Fb. selection
See the chapter
Fieldbus control.
AI5, AI6
DI11, DI12
REF1 (rpm)
Reference
AI1 / Std IO = Analogue input AI1 on the standard I/O terminal block
AI1 / AIO ext = Analogue input AI1 on the analogue I/O extension module
Fieldbus adapter slot 1
CH0 / RDCO board
Standard ModBus Link
Program features
46
Reference types and processing
The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analogue
input signal and control panel signals.
The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs: One digital input
increases the speed, the other decreases it.
The drive accepts a bipolar analogue speed reference. This feature allows both
the speed and direction to be controlled with a single analogue input. The
minimum signal is full speed reversed and the maximum signal is full speed
forward.
The drive can form a reference out of two analogue input signals by using
mathematical functions: Addition, subtraction, multiplication, minimum selection,
and maximum selection.
The drive can form a reference out of an analogue input signal and a signal
received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical
functions: addition and multiplication.
It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and
maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum
speed limits.
Settings
Diagnostics
Parameter Additional information
Group 11 REFERENCE
SELECT
External reference source, type and scaling
Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits
Group 22 ACCEL/DECEL Speed reference acceleration and deceleration ramps
Group 24 TORQUE CTRL Torque reference ramp times
Group 32 SUPERVISION Reference supervision
Actual signal Additional information
01.11, 01.12 Values of external references
Group 02 ACTUAL SIGNALS The reference values in different stages of the reference processing
chain.
Parameter
Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Active reference / reference loss through a relay output
Group 15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
Reference value
Program features
47
Reference trimming
In reference trimming, the external %-reference (External reference REF2) is
corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable.
The block diagram below illustrates the function.
Settings
40.14 40.18 Trimming function settings
40.01 40.13, 40.19 PID control block settings
Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits
40.14
Select
%ref
1
Mul.
Mul.
Add
%ref= The drive reference before trimming
%ref = The drive reference after trimming
max. speed= Par. 20.02 (or 20.01 if the absolute value is greater)
max. freq = Par. 20.08 (or 20.07 if the absolute value is greater)
max. torq = Par. 20.14 (or 20.13 if the absolute value is greater)
%ref
%ref
DIRECT (3)
PROPOR. (2)
OFF (1)
max.speed
Switch
max.freq
99.04 (DTC)
40.17
PID
tref
k
ti
td
i
dFiltT
errVInv
rInt
oh1
ol1
Actual Values
40.05
40.07
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI5
AI6
IMOT
40.19
Filter
40.15
Select
AI1
AI2
...
40.16
40.01
40.02
40.03
40.04
40.05
40.13
PIDmax
PIDmin
.
.
.
40.18
Select
max.torque
Program features
48
Example
The drive runs a conveyor line. It is speed-controlled but the line tension also needs
to be taken into account: If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint, the
speed will be slightly decreased, and vice versa.
To accomplish the desired speed correction, the user:
activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the
measured tension to it
tunes the trimming to a suitable level.
Drive rollers (pull)
Tension measurement
Speed controlled conveyor line
PID
Add
Tension
measurement
Speed reference
Tension
setpoint
Trimmed
speed reference
Simplified block diagram
Program features
49
Programmable analogue inputs
The drive has three programmable analogue inputs: one voltage input (0/2 to 10 V or
-10 to 10 V) and two current inputs (0/4 to 20 mA). Two extra inputs are available if
an optional analogue I/O extension module is used. Each input can be inverted and
filtered, and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted.
Update cycles in the Standard Application Program
1)
Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function. See group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
Settings
Diagnostics
Input Cycle
AI / standard 6 ms
AI / extension 6 ms (100 ms
1)
)
Group 11 REFERENCE
SELECT
AI as a reference source
Group 13 ANALOGUE
INPUTS
Processing of the standard inputs
30.01 Supervision of AI loss
Group 40 PID
CONTROL
AI as a PID process control reference or actual values
35.01 AI in a motor temperature measurement
40.15 AI in a drive reference trimming
42.07 AI in a mechanical brake control function
98.06 Activation of optional analogue inputs
98.13 Optional AI signal type definition (bipolar or unipolar)
98.14 Optional AI signal type definition (bipolar or unipolar)
Actual value Additional information
01.18, 01.19, 01.20 Values of standard inputs
01.38, 01.39 Value of optional inputs
Group 09 ACTUAL
SIGNALS
Scaled analogue input values (integer values for function block
programming)
Program features
50
Programmable analogue outputs
Two programmable current outputs (0/4 to 20 mA) are available as standard, and
two outputs can be added by using an optional analogue I/O extension module.
Analogue output signals can be inverted and filtered.
The analogue output signals can be proportional to motor speed, process speed
(scaled motor speed), output frequency, output current, motor torque, motor power,
etc.
It is possible to write a value to an analogue output through a serial communication
link.
1)
Update cycle in the motor temperature measurement function. See group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
Settings
Diagnostics
Output Cycle
AO / standard 24 ms
AO / extension 24 ms (1000 ms
1)
)
Group 15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
AO value selection and processing (standard outputs)
30.20 Operation of an externally controlled AO in a communication break
30.22 Supervision of the use of optional AO
Group 35 MOT TEMP
MEAS
AO in motor temperature measurement
Group 96 EXTERNAL
AO
Optional AO value selection and processing
Group 98 OPTION
MODULES
Activation of optional I/O
01.22, 01.23 Values of the standard outputs
01.28, 01.29 Values of the optional outputs
Warning
IO CONFIG Improper use of optional I/O
Program features
51
Programmable digital inputs
The drive has six programmable digital inputs as a standard. Six extra inputs are
available if optional digital I/O extension modules are used.
Settings
Diagnostics
Input Cycle
DI / standard 6 ms
DI / extension 12 ms
Group 10 START/STOP/
DIR
DI as start, stop, direction
Group 11 REFERENCE
SELECT
DI in reference selection, or reference source
Group 12 CONSTANT
SPEEDS
DI in constant speed selection
Group 16 SYSTEM CTRL
INPUTS
DI as external Run Enable, fault reset or user macro change signal
22.01 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal
30.03 DI as external fault source
30.05 DI in motor overtemperature supervision function
30.22 Supervision of optional I/O use
40.20 DI as sleep function activation signal (in PID process control)
42.02 DI as mechanical brake acknowledgement signal
98.03 96.05 Activation of the optional digital I/O extension modules
98.09 98.11 Naming of the optional digital inputs in the application program
01.17 Values of the standard digital inputs
01.40 Values of the optional digital inputs
Warning
IO CONFIG Improper use of optional I/O
Fault
I/O COMM ERR (7000) Communication loss to I/O
Program features
52
Programmable relay outputs
As standard there are three programmable relay outputs. Six outputs can be added
by using the optional digital I/O extension modules. By means of a parameter setting
it is possible to choose which information to indicate through the relay output: ready,
running, fault, warning, motor stall, etc.
It is possible to write a value to a relay output through a serial communication link.
Settings
Diagnostics
Output Cycle
RO / standard 100 ms
RO / extension 100 ms
Group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS
RO value selections and operation times
30.20 Operation of an externally controlled relay output on a communication break
Group 42 BRAKE
CONTROL
RO in a mechanical brake control
Group 98 OPTION
MODULES
Activation of optional relay outputs
01.21 Standard relay output states
01.41 Optional relays output states
Program features
53
Actual signals
Several actual signals are available:
Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power
Motor speed and torque
Mains voltage and intermediate circuit DC voltage
Active control location (Local, EXT1 or EXT2)
Reference values
Drive temperature
Operating time counter (h), kWh counter
Digital I/O and Analogue I/O status
PID controller actual values (if the PID Control macro is selected)
Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the control panel display. It is also
possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the
analogue outputs.
Settings
Diagnostics
Group 15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
Selection of an actual signal to an analogue output
Group 92 D SET TR
ADDR
Selection of an actual signal to a dataset (serial communication)
Group 01 ACTUAL
SIGNALS 09
ACTUAL SIGNALS
Lists of actual signals
Program features
54
Motor identification
The performance of Direct Torque Control is based on an accurate motor model
determined during the motor start-up.
A motor Identification Magnetisation is automatically done the first time the start
command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetised at zero speed
for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification
method is suitable for most applications.
In demanding applications a separate Identification Run can be performed.
Settings
Parameter 99.10.
Power loss ride-through
If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilising
the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as
the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the
operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.
Note: Cabinet assembled units equipped with main contactor option have a hold
circuit that keeps the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break.
The allowed duration of the break is adjustable. The factory setting is five seconds.
130
260
390
520
1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4
t(s)
U
DC
f
out
T
M
U
DC
= Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, f
out
= output frequency of the drive,
T
M
= Motor torque
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (f
out
= 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the
minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the mains is switched off. The drive
runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the
motor has enough kinetic energy.
U
mains
20
40
60
80
40
80
120
160
T
M
(Nm)
f
out
(Hz)
U
DC
(V d.c.)
Program features
55
Automatic Start
Since the drive can detect the state of the motor within a few milliseconds, the
starting is immediate under all conditions. There is no restart delay. E.g. the starting
of turbining pumps or windmilling fans is easy.
Settings
Parameter 21.01.
DC Magnetising
When DC Magnetising is activated, the drive automatically magnetises the motor
before starting. This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque, up
to 200% of motor nominal torque. By adjusting the premagnetising time, it is possible
to synchronise the motor start and e.g. a mechanical brake release. The Automatic
Start feature and DC Magnetising cannot be activated at the same time.
Settings
Parameters 21.01 and 21.02.
DC Hold
By activating the motor DC Hold feature it is possible to
lock the rotor at zero speed. When both the reference
and the motor speed fall below the preset DC hold
speed, the drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC
into the motor. When the reference speed again exceeds
the DC hold speed, the normal drive operation resumes.
Settings
Parameters 21.04, 21.05, and 21.06.
DC hold
t
Motor
DC Hold
speed
DC hold
speed
t
Speed
Reference
Speed
Program features
56
Flux Braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetisation in
the motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during
braking can be converted to motor thermal energy. This feature is useful in motor
power ranges below 15 kW.
The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during the Flux Braking.
Therefore, Flux Braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing
the speed. The other benefits of Flux Braking are:
The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does
not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
The cooling of the motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor increases
during the Flux Braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more
efficiently than the rotor.
Settings
Parameter 26.02.
Flux Braking
No Flux Braking
t (s)
Motor
Flux Braking
No Flux Braking
f (Hz)
T
Br
T
N
20
40
60
(%)
T
N
= 100 Nm
T
Br
= Braking Torque
Speed
50 HZ/60 Hz
120
80
40
0
5 10 20 30 40 50
1
2
3
4
5
120
80
40
0
5 10 20 30 40 50
1
2
3
4
5
f (Hz)
Braking Torque (%)
f (Hz)
Flux Braking
No Flux Braking
1
2
3
4
5
2.2 kW
15 kW
37 kW
75 kW
250 kW
Rated Motor Power
Program features
57
Flux Optimisation
Flux Optimisation reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when
the drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and the drive)
can be improved by 1% to 10%, depending on the load torque and speed.
Settings
Parameter 26.01.
Acceleration and deceleration ramps
Two user-selectable acceleration and deceleration ramps are available. It is possible
to adjust the acceleration/deceleration times and the ramp shape. Switching
between the two ramps can be controlled via a digital input.
The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear
and S-curve.
Linear: Suitable for drives requiring steady or slow
acceleration/deceleration.
S-curve: Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads,
or other applications where a smooth transition is
required when changing the speed.
Settings
Parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL.
Critical speeds
A Critical Speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid
certain motor speeds or speed bands because of e.g. mechanical resonance
problems.
Settings
Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS.
Constant speeds
It is possible to predefine 15 constant speeds. Constant speeds are selected with
digital inputs. Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference.
Settings
Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS.
Linear
t (s)
Motor
2
speed
S-curve
Program features
58
Speed controller tuning
During the motor identification, the speed controller is automatically tuned. It is,
however, possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time and
derivation time, or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune Run. In
Autotune Run, the speed controller is tuned based on the load and inertia of the
motor and the machine. The figure below shows speed responses at a speed
reference step (typically, 1 to 20%).
The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller
output is the reference for the torque controller.
Settings
Parameter group 23 SPEED CTRL and 20 LIMITS.
Diagnostics
Actual signal 01.02.
A : Undercompensated
B : Normally tuned (autotuning)
C : Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B
D : Overcompensated speed controller
%
t
n
C B D
n
N
A
Derivative
Proportional,
integral
Derivative
acceleration
compensation
Torque
reference
Speed
reference
Calculated actual speed
Error
value
-
+
+
+
+
Program features
59
Speed control performance figures
The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control when Direct
Torque Control is used.
Torque control performance figures
The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the
motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control,
when Direct Torque Control is used.
Scalar control
It is possible to select Scalar Control as the motor control method instead of Direct
Torque Control (DTC). In the Scalar Control mode, the drive is controlled with a
frequency reference. The outstanding performance of the default motor control
method, Direct Torque Control, is not achieved in Scalar Control.
It is recommended to activate the Scalar Control mode in the following special
applications:
100
t (s)
T
T
N
(%)
T
load
n
act
-n
ref
n
N
0.1 - 0.4 %sec
T
N
= rated motor torque
n
N
= rated motor speed
n
act
= actual speed
n
ref
= speed reference
*Dynamic speed error depends on speed controller tuning.
Speed Control No Pulse
Encoder
With Pulse
Encoder
Static speed error,
% of n
N
+ 0.1 to 0.5 %
(10% of nominal
slip)
+ 0.01 %
Dynamic speed
error
0.4 %sec.* 0.1 %sec.*
*When operated around zero frequency, the error may be
greater.
Torque Control No Pulse
Encoder
With Pulse
Encoder
Linearity error + 4 %* + 3 %
Repeatability
error
+ 3 %* + 1 %
Torque rise time 1 to 5 ms 1 to 5 ms
100
t(s)
T
T
N
< 5 ms
90
10
(%)
T
ref
T
act
T
N
= rated motor torque
T
ref
= torque reference
T
act
= actual torque
Program features
60
In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if
the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after
the motor identification
If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of
the drive
If the drive is used without a motor connected (e.g. for test purposes)
The drive runs a medium voltage motor via a step-up transformer.
In the Scalar Control mode, some standard features are not available.
Settings
Parameter 99.04.
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive
IR Compensation is active only when the motor
control mode is Scalar (see the section Scalar
control above). When IR Compensation is
activated, the drive gives an extra voltage boost
to the motor at low speeds. IR Compensation is
useful in applications that require high breakaway
torque. In Direct Torque Control, no IR
Compensation is possible/needed.
Settings
Parameter 26.03.
Hexagonal motor flux
Typically the drive controls the motor flux in such a way that the rotating flux vector
follows a circular pattern. This is ideal in most applications. When operated above
the field weakening point (FWP, typically 50 or 60 Hz), it is, however, not possible to
reach 100% of the output voltage. The peak load capacity of the drive is lower than
with the full voltage.
If hexagonal flux control is selected, the motor flux is controlled along a circular
pattern below the field weakening point, and along a hexagonal pattern in the field
weakening range. The applied pattern is changed gradually as the frequency
increases from 100% to 120% of the FWP. Using the hexagonal flux pattern, the
maximum output voltage can be reached; The peak load capacity is higher than with
the circular flux pattern but the continuous load capacity is lower in the frequency
range of FWP to 1.6 FWP, due to increased losses.
Settings
Parameter 26.05.
f (Hz)
Motor Voltage
No compensation
IR Compensation

Program features
61
Programmable protection functions
AI<Min
AI<Min function defines the drive operation if an analogue input signal falls below the
preset minimum limit.
Settings
Parameter 30.01.
Panel Loss
Panel Loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as
control location for the drive stops communicating.
Settings
Parameter 30.02.
External Fault
External Faults can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an
external fault indication signal.
Settings
Parameter 30.03.
Motor Thermal Protection
The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal
Protection function and by selecting one of the motor thermal protection modes
available.
The Motor Thermal Protection modes are based either on a motor temperature
thermal model or on an overtemperature indication from a motor thermistor.
Motor temperature thermal model
The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following
assumptions:
1) The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 C when power is applied to the
drive.
2) Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically
calculated motor thermal time and motor load curve (see the figures below). The
load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C.
Program features
62
Use of the motor thermistor
It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor thermistor
(PTC) between the +24 VDC voltage supply offered by the drive and digital input
DI6. In normal motor operation temperature, the thermistor resistance should be less
than 1.5 kohm (current 5 mA). The drive stops the motor and gives a fault indication
if the thermistor resistance exceeds 4 kohm The installation must meet the
regulations for protecting against contact.
Settings
Parameters 30.04 to 30.09.
Note: It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function. See
the subsection Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O.
Stall Protection
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision
limits (frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition
(warning indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
Settings
Underload Protection
Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The drive provides an
underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault
condition. Supervision limits - underload curve and underload time - can be chosen
as well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition (warning
indication / fault indication & stop the drive / no reaction).
Settings
Motor
100%
Temp.
63%
Motor thermal time
t
t
100%
50
100
150
Zero speed load
Motor load curve
Break point Motor
Speed
Load Current
(%)
Rise
Program features
63
Motor Phase Loss
The Phase Loss function monitors the status of the motor cable connection. The
function is useful especially during the motor start: the drive detects if any of the
motor phases is not connected and refuses to start. The Phase Loss function also
supervises the motor connection status during normal operation.
Settings
Parameter 30.16.
Earth Fault Protection
The Earth Fault Protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable.
The Earth Fault protection is based on earth leakage current measurement with a
summation current transformer at the output of the converter.
An earth fault in the mains does not activate the protection.
In an earthed (grounded) supply, the protection activates in 200 microseconds.
In floating mains, the mains capacitance should be 1 microfarad or more.
The capacitive currents due to screened copper motor cables up to 300 metres
do not activate the protection.
Settings
Parameter 30.17.
Communication Fault
The Communication Fault function supervises the communication between the drive
and an external control device (e.g. a fieldbus adapter module).
Settings
Supervision of optional IO
The function supervises the use of the optional analogue and digital inputs and
outputs in the application program, and warns if the communication to the input/
output is not operational.
Settings
Parameter 30.22.
Program features
64
Preprogrammed Faults
Overcurrent
The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 1.65 to 2.17 I
max
depending on drive type.
DC overvoltage
The DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 U
1max
, where U
1max
is the maximum value of the
mains voltage range. For 400 V units, U
1max
is 415 V. For 500 V units, U
1max
is 500
V. For 690 V units, U
1max
is 690 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit
corresponding to the mains voltage trip level is 728 VDC for 400 V units, 877 VDC
for 500 V units, and 1210 VDC for 690 V units.
DC undervoltage
The DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.65 U
1min
, where U
1min
is the minimum value of
the mains voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units, U
1min
is 380 V. For 690 V units,
U
1min
is 525 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the
mains voltage trip level is 334 VDC for 400 V and 500 V units, and 461 VDC for 690
V units.
Drive temperature
The drive supervises the inverter module temperature. If the inverter module
temperature exceeds 115 C, a warning is given. The temperature trip level is
125 C.
Short circuit
There are separate protection circuits for supervising the motor cable and the
inverter short circuits. If a short circuit occurs, the drive will not start and a fault
indication is given.
Input phase loss
Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the mains cable connection status by
detecting intermediate circuit ripple. If a phase is lost, the ripple increases. The drive
is stopped and a fault indication is given if the ripple exceeds 13%.
Ambient temperature
The drive will not start if the ambient temperature is below -5 to
0 C or above 73 to 82 C (the exact limits vary within the given ranges depending
on drive type).
Overfrequency
If the drive output frequency exceeds the preset level, the drive is stopped and a
fault indication is given. The preset level is 50 Hz over the operating range absolute
maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar
Control active).
Program features
65
Internal fault
If the drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is
given.
Operation limits
ACS800 has adjustable limits for speed, current (maximum), torque (maximum) and
DC voltage.
Settings
Parameter group 20 LIMITS.
Power limit
The maximum allowed motor power is 1.5 P
hd
. If the limit is exceeded, the motor
torque is automatically restricted. The function protects the input bridge of the drive
against overload.
Automatic resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage
and analogue input below a minimum faults. The Automatic Resets must be
activated by the user.
Settings
Parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET.
Program features
66
Supervisions
The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user-
defined limits. The user may set limits for speed, current etc.
Settings
Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
Diagnostics
Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock.
Settings
Parameters 16.02 and 16.03.
Process PID control
There is a built-in PID controller in the drive. The controller can be used to control
process variables such as pressure, flow or fluid level.
When the process PID control is activated, a process reference (setpoint) is
connected to the drive instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process
feedback) is also brought back to the drive. The process PID control adjusts the
drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity (actual value) at the
desired level (reference).
The block diagram below on the right illustrates the process PID control.
The figure on the left shows an application example: The controller adjusts the
speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set
pressure reference.
Actual Signals Additional information
03.02 Supervision limit indicating bits in a packed boolean word
Group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS
Supervision limit indication through a relay output
Program features
67
Settings
Diagnostics
Parameter Purpose
99.02 Process PID control activation
40.01 - 40.13, 40.19,
40.25 - 40.27
The settings of the process PID controller
32.13 to 32.18 The supervision limits for the process reference REF2 and the variables
ACT1 and ACT2
Actual Signals Purpose
01.12, 01.24, 01.25,
01.26 and 01.34
PID process controller reference, actual values and error value
Group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS
Supervision limit exceeded indication through a relay output
Group 15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
PID process controller values through standard analogue outputs
Group 96 EXTERNAL
AO
PID process controller values through optional analogue outputs
ACT PAR FUNC DRIVE
ENTER
LOC REM RESET REF
ACS600
0...10 bar
4...20 mA
3
3
2
PID
ref
k
ti
td
i
dFiltT
errVInv
rInt
oh1
ol1
Actual Values
40.06
40.12
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI5
AI6
IMOT
40.19
Filter
%ref
40.01
40.02
40.03
40.04
40.05
40.13
PIDmax
PIDmin
Switch
Speed
reference
Frequency
reference
99.04 = 0
(DTC)
Example:
.
.
.
PID Control Block Diagram
%ref = external reference EXT REF2 (see
parameter 11.06)
Pressure boost pump
ACS800
Program features
68
Sleep function for the process PID control
The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable/disable logic. The
sleep function can be put into use only when the process PID control is active.
Example
The time scheme below visualises the operation of the sleep function.
1)
1 = Activate
sleeping
0 = Deactivate
sleeping
40.20
Select
Compare
1<2
Or
<1
40.22
Delay
t
1
2
40.21
Mot.speed
0
DI1
And
&
%refActive
PIDCtrlActive
modulating
Set/Reset
S
R
S/R
Compare
1<2
1
2 40.23
0
INTERNAL
DI1
40.24
Delay
t
Or
<1
StartRq
03.02 (B1)
03.02 (B2)
1)
01.34
INTERNAL
.
.
.
40.20
Select
.
.
.
Mot.speed: Actual speed of the motor
%refActive: The % reference (EXT REF2) is in use. See Parameter 11.02.
PIDCtrlActive: 99.02 is PID CTRL
modulating: The inverter IGBT control is operating
Actual Value
Wake-up level
Parameter 42.23
Motor Speed
Sleep level
Par. 40.21
Time
Time
START STOP
t<t
d
t
d
t
d
= Sleep delay, parameter 40.22
Text on display
SLEEP MODE
t
wd
t
wd
= Wake-up delay, parameter 40.24
Program features
69
Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump: The water consumption
falls at night. As a consequence, the PID process controller decreases the motor
speed. However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the
centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor does not stop but keeps rotating. The
sleep function detects the slow rotation, and stops the unnecessary pumping after
the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the
pressure. The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum
level and the wake-up delay has passed.
Settings
Diagnostics
Warning SLEEP MODE on the panel display.
99.02 Process PID control activation
40.20 - 40.24 Sleep function settings
Program features
70
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O
This subsection describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the
drive control board RMIO is used as the connection interface.
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor
to the RMIO board, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts
and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of
8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement:
The RMIO board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not
be connected to other equipment.
Or
The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RMIO board terminals.
Motor
T
10 nF
RMIO board
AI1+
AI1-
AO1+
AO1-
Motor
T
RMIO board
AI1+
AI1-
AO1+
AO1-
T T
One sensor
Three sensors
10 nF
Program features
71
Settings
Diagnostics
15.01 Analogue output in a motor 1 temperature measurement. Set to M1 TEMP
MEAS.
35.01 35.03 Settings of motor 1 temperature measurement
Other
Parameters 13.01 to 13.05 (AI1 processing) and 15.02 to 15.05 (AO1 processing) are not effective.
At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible,
the shield is to be left unconnected.
Actual values Additional information
01.35 Temperature value
03.08 Warning bit state
03.15 Fault bit states
03.16 Warning bit states
Warnings
MOTOR 1 TEMP (4312) Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 03.16
T MEAS ALM Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 03.08
Faults
Program features
72
Motor temperature measurement through the analogue I/O extension
This subsection describes the motor temperature measurement of one motor when
an optional analogue I/O extension module RAIO is used as the connection
interface.
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor
to the RAIO module, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live
parts and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage
distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the
requirement:
The RAIO module terminals must be protected against contact and they may not
be connected to other equipment.
Or
The temperature sensor must be isolated from the RAIO module terminals.
Motor
T
10 nF
RAIO module
AI1+
AI1-
AO1+
AO1-
Motor
T T T
One sensor
Three sensors
10 nF
RAIO module
AI1+
AI1-
AO1+
AO1-
Program features
73
Settings
Diagnostics
35.01 35.03 Settings of motor 1 temperature measurement
98.12 Activation of optional analogue I/O for motor temperature measurement
Other
Parameters 13.16 to 13.20 (AI1 processing) and 96.01 to 96.05 (AO1 signal selection and processing)
are not effective.
At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible,
the shield is to be left unconnected.
Actual values Additional information
01.35 Temperature value
03.08 Fault bit in a packed boolean word
03.15 Warning bit in a packed boolean word
03.16 Fault bit in a packed boolean word
Warnings
T MEAS ALM Chapter Fault tracing and parameter 03.08
Faults
Program features
74
Adaptive Programming using the function blocks
Conventionally, the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters. Each
parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range. The parameters make the
programming easy, but the choices are limited. The user cannot customise the
operation any further. The Adaptive Program makes freer customising possible
without the need of a special programming tool or language:
The program is built of standard function blocks included in the drive application
program.
The control panel is the programming tool.
The user can document the program by drawing it on block diagram template
sheets.
The maximum size of the Adaptive Program is 15 function blocks. The program may
consist of several separate functions.
For more information, see Application Guide for Adaptive Program (code: 3AFE
64527274 [English]).
Program features
75
Control of a mechanical brake
The mechanical brake is used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero
speed when the drive is stopped, or not powered.
Example
The figure below shows a brake control application example.
WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake control
function is integrated fulfils the personnel safety regulations. Note that the frequency
converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module, as defined in IEC
61800-2), is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the European
Machinery Directive and related harmonised standards. Thus, the personnel safety
of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific frequency converter
feature (such as the brake control function), but it has to be implemented as defined
in the application specific regulations.
Motor
M
230 VAC
RMIO board
Mechanical brake
Brake control
hardware
Emergency
brake
X25
1 RO1
2 RO1
3 RO1
X22
5 DI5
7 +24 V
Brake control logic is integrated in
the drive application program. The
brake control hardware and wirings
needs to be done by the user.
- Brake on/off control through relay
output RO1.
- Brake supervision through digital
input DI5 (optional).
- Emergency brake switch in the
brake control circuit.
Program features
76
Operation time scheme
The time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function. See
also the state machine on the following page.
T
s
Start torque at brake release (Parameter 42.07 and 42.08)
t
md
Motor magnetising delay
t
od
Brake open delay (Parameter 42.03)
n
cs
Brake close speed (Parameter 42.05)
t
cd
Brake close delay (Parameter 42.04)
Start command
Inverter modulating
Motor magnetised
Open brake
command
Internal speed
reference (actual
motor speed)
Torque reference
time
t
od
t
cd
n
cs
T
s
External speed
reference
t
md
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Program features
77
State shifts
RFG INPUT
TO ZERO
CLOSE
BRAKE
BRAKE
ACK FAULT
OPEN
BRAKE
From any state
1/1/1
0/1/1
1/1/1
1/1/0
0/0/1
1)
2)
RELEASE RFG
INPUT
3)
4)
7)
8)
10)
11)
12)
13)
5)
NO
MODULATION
0/0/1
9)
6)
A
A
State (Symbol )
- NN: State name
- X/Y/Z: State outputs/operations
X = 1 Open the brake. The relay output set to brake on/off control energises.
Y = 1 Forced start. The function keeps the internal Start on until the brake is closed in spite of the
status of the external Start signal.
Z = 1 Ramp in zero. Forces the used speed reference (internal) to zero along a ramp.
NN
X/Y/Z
State change conditions (Symbol )
1) Brake control active 0 -> 1 OR Inverter is modulating = 0
2) Motor magnetised = 1 AND Drive running = 1
3) Brake acknowledgement = 1 AND Brake open delay passed AND Start = 1
4) Start = 0
5) Start = 0
6) Start = 1
7) Actual motor speed < Brake close speed AND Start = 0
8) Start = 1
9) Brake acknowledgement = 0 AND Brake close delay passed = 1 AND Start = 0
Only if parameter 42.02 OFF:
10) Brake acknowledgement = 0 AND Brake open delay passed =1
11) Brake acknowledgement = 0
12) Brake acknowledgement = 0
13) Brake acknowledgement = 1 AND Brake close delay passed = 1
=
RFG = Ramp Function
Generator in the speed
control loop (reference
handling).
(rising edge)
Program features
78
Settings
Diagnostics
14.01 Relay output for the brake control (set to BRAKE CTRL)
Group 42 BRAKE
CONTROL
Brake function settings
03.01 Ramp in zero bit
03.13 The state of bit brake open/close command
03.15 Fault bit state
03.16 Warning bit state
Warnings
BRAKE ACKN (ff74) Chapter Fault tracing, and actual signal 03.16
Faults
BRAKE ACKN (ff74) Chapter Fault tracing, and actual signal 03.15
Program features
79
Master/Follower use of several drives
In a Master/Follower application, the system is run by several drives, the motor
shafts of which are coupled to each other. The master and follower drives
communicate via a fibre optic link. The figures below illustrate two basic application
types.
Settings and diagnostics
Group 60 MASTER/
FOLLOWER
Master/Follower parameters
Other
Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFE 64590430 [English]) explains the functionality more in
details
Supply
3 3
Solidly coupled motor shafts:
- Speed-controlled Master
- Follower follows the torque reference
of the Master
External control
signals
Supply
3
n 3
2 2
Master/
Follower Link
Follower fault
supervision
3
2 2
Master/Follower
Link
Follower fault
supervision
3
3
External control
signals
Supply
3
n
Flexibly coupled motor shafts:
- Speed-controlled Master
- Follower follows the speed reference
of the Master
Supply
M/F Application, Overview
Program features
80
Jogging
The jogging function is typically used to control a cyclical movement of a machine
section. One push button controls the drive through the whole cycle: When it is on,
the drive starts, accelerates to a preset speed at a preset rate. When it is off, the
drive decelerates to zero speed at a preset rate.
The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive. They also represent
how the drive shifts to normal operation ( = jogging inactive) when the drive start
command is switched on. Jog cmd = State of the jogging input, Start cmd = State of
the drive start command.
x = State can be either 1 or 0.
Phase Jog
cmd
Start
cmd
Description
1-2 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
2-3 1 0 Drive runs at the jogging speed.
3-4 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
4-5 0 0 Drive is stopped.
5-6 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function.
7-8 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the
active acceleration ramp.
8-9 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows the speed reference.
9-10 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp.
10-11 0 0 Drive is stopped.
11-12 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the
active acceleration ramp.
12-13 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows he speed reference.
13-14 1 0 Drive decelerates to the jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
15-16 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
Time
Speed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Program features
81
Note: The jogging is not operational when:
the drive start command is on, or
the drive is in local control (L visible on the first row of the panel display).
Note: The jogging speed overrides the constant speeds.
Note: The ramp shape time is set to zero during the jogging.
Settings
10.06 Input for the on/off control of the jogging.
12.15 Jogging speed.
21.10 Switch off delay for the inverter IGBT control. A delay keeps the inverter
modulation live over a short standstill period enabling a smooth restart.
22.04, 22.05 Acceleration and deceleration times used during the jogging.
22.06 Acceleration and deceleration ramp shape time: Set to zero during the
jogging.
Program features
82
Application macros
83
Application macros
Chapter overview
This chapter describes the intended use, operation and the default control
connections of the standard application macros. It also describes how to save a user
macro, and how to recall it.
Overview of macros
Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets. While starting up the drive,
the user can select one of the macros by parameter 99.02.
There are five standard macros and two user macros. The table below contains a
summary of the macros and describes suitable applications.
Macro Suitable Applications
Factory Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant speeds
are used:
- Conveyors
- Speed-controlled pumps and fans
- Test benches with predefined constant speeds
Hand/Auto Speed control applications. Switching between two external control devices is
possible.
PID Control Process control applications e.g. different closed loop control systems such as
pressure control, level control, and flow control. For example:
- pressure boost pumps of municipal water supply systems
- level controlling pumps of water reservoirs
- pressure boost pumps of district heating systems
- material flow control on a conveyor line.
It is also possible to switch between process and speed control.
Torque
Control
Torque control applications. Switching between torque and speed control is
possible.
Sequential
Control
Speed control applications in which speed reference, seven constant speeds and
two acceleration and deceleration ramps can be used.
User The user can save the customised standard macro i.e. the parameter settings
including group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent
memory, and recall the data at a later time. Two user macros are essential when
switching between two different motors is required
Application macros
84
Factory macro
All drive commands and reference settings can be given from the control panel or
from an external control location. The active control location is selected with the
LOC/REM key of the panel. The drive is speed-controlled.
In external control, the control location is EXT1. The reference signal is connected to
analogue input AI1 and Start/Stop and Direction signals are connected to digital
inputs DI1 and DI2. By default, the direction is fixed to FORWARD (parameter
10.03). DI2 does not control the direction of rotation unless parameter 10.03 is
changed to REQUEST.
Three constant speeds are selected by digital inputs DI5 and DI6. Two acceleration/
deceleration ramps are preset. The acceleration and deceleration ramps are used
according to the state of digital input DI4.
Two analogue signals (speed and current) and three relay output signals (ready,
running and inverted fault) are available.
The default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT
and POWER.
Application macros
85
Default control connections
The figure below shows the external control connections for the Factory macro. The
markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
X20
1 VREF Reference voltage -10 VDC
2 GND 1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm
X21
1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC
1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm 2 GND
3 AI1+ Speed reference 0(2) 10 V, R
in
> 200 kohm
4 AI1-
5 AI2+ By default, not in use. 0(4) 20 mA, R
in
=
100 ohm 6 AI2-
in
=
100 ohm 8 AI3-
9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) 20 mA 0 motor nom.
speed, R
L
< 700 ohm 10 AO1-
11 AO2+ Output current 0(4) 20 mA 0 motor
nom. current, R
L
< 700 ohm 12 AO2-
X22
1 DI1 Stop/Start
2)
2 DI2 Forward/reverse
1, 2)
3 DI3 By default, not in use.
2)
4 DI4 Acceleration & deceleration select
3)
5 DI5 Constant speed select
4)
4)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
9 DGND1 Digital ground
11 DI IL Start interlock (0 = stop)
5)
X23
1 +24 V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
24 VDC, 250 mA 2 GND
X25
1 RO11 Relay output 1
Ready
2 RO12
3 RO13
X26
Running
2 RO22
3 RO23
X27
1 R031 Relay output 3
Inverted fault
2 R032
3 R033
=
=
A
rpm
Fault
1)
Effective only if parameter 10.03 is
switched to REQUEST by the user.
2)
The US default settings differs as
follows (valid if the type code digit for
the application program has value
B):
3)
0 = ramp times according to par.
22.02 and 22.03. 1 = ramp times
according to par. 22.04 and 22.05.
4)
See parameter group 12
CONSTANT SPEEDS:
5)
DI1 Start (Pulse: 0->1)
DI2 Stop (Pulse: 1->0)
DI3 Forward/Reverse
DI5 DI6 Operation
0 0 Set speed through AI1
1 0 Speed 1
0 1 Speed 2
1 1 Speed 3
Application macros
86
Hand/Auto macro
Start/Stop and Direction commands and reference settings can be given from one of
two external control locations, EXT1 (Hand) or EXT2 (Auto). The Start/Stop/Direction
commands of EXT1 (Hand) are connected to digital inputs DI1 and DI2, and the
reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1. The Start/Stop/Direction
commands of EXT2 (Auto) are connected to digital inputs DI5 and DI6, and the
reference signal is connected to analogue input AI2. The selection between EXT1
and EXT2 is dependent on the status of digital input DI3. The drive is speed
controlled. Speed reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands can be given
from the control panel keypad also. One constant speed can be selected through
digital input DI4.
Speed reference in Auto Control (EXT2) is given as a percentage of the maximum
speed of the drive.
Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. The
default signals on the display of the control panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT and
CTRL LOC.
Application macros
87
The figure below shows the external control connections for the Hand/Auto macro.
The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
A
rpm
Fault
X20
2 GND 1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm
X21
1 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC, kohm < R
L
<
10 kohm 2 GND
3 AI1+ Speed reference (Hand control). 0(2) 10 V,
R
in
> 200 kohm 4 AI1-
5 AI2+ Speed reference (Auto control). 0(4)
20 mA, R
in
= 100 ohm 6 AI2-
7 AI3+ By default, not in use. 0(4) 20 mA,
R
in
= 100 ohm. 8 AI3-
speed, R
L
< 700 ohm 10 AO1-
nom. current, R
L
< 700 ohm 12 AO2-
X22
1 DI1 Stop/Start (Hand control)
2 DI2 Forward/Reverse (Hand control)
3 DI3 Hand/Auto control select
1)

4 DI4 Constant speed 4: Par. 12.05
5 DI5 Forward/Reverse (Auto control)
6 DI6 Stop/Start (Auto control)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
2)
X23
X25
Ready
2 RO12
3 RO13
X26
Running
2 RO22
3 RO23
X27
Inverted fault
2 R032
3 R033
=
=
1)
Selection between two external
control locations, EXT1 and EXT2.
2)
Application macros
88
PID Control macro
The PID Control macro is used for controlling a process variable such as pressure
or flow by controlling the speed of the driven motor.
Process reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1 and process feedback
signal to analogue input AI2.
Alternatively, a direct speed reference can be given to the drive through analogue
input AI1. Then the PID controller is bypassed and the drive no longer controls the
process variable. Selection between the direct speed control and the process
variable control is done with digital input DI3.
default signals on the display of the control panel are SPEED, ACTUAL VALUE1 and
CONTROL DEVIATION.
Application macros
89
The figure below shows the external control connections for the PID Control macro.
The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
A
rpm
PT
X20
2 GND 1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm
X21
1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm 2 GND
3 AI1+ Speed ref. (speed cntrl) or process ref.
(process cntrl). 0(2) 10 V, R
in
> 200 kohm 4 AI1-
5 AI2+ Process actual value measurement. 0(4)
20 mA, R
in
= 100 ohm 6 AI2-
in
=
100 ohm. 8 AI3-
9 AO1+ Motor speed 0(4) 20 mA
0 motor nom. speed, R
L
< 700 ohm 10 AO1-
11 AO2+ Output current 0(4) 20 mA
0 motor nom. current, R
L
< 700 ohm 12 AO2-
X22
1 DI1 Stop/Start (speed control)
2 DI2 By default, not in use.
3 DI3 Speed / process control select
1)
2)
5 DI5 Run Enable.
3)
6 DI6 Stop/Start (process control)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
4)
X23
X25
Ready
2 RO12
3 RO13
X26
Running
2 RO22
3 RO23
X27
Inverted fault
2 R032
3 R033
=
=
Fault
1)
Selection between two external
control locations, EXT1 and EXT2
2)
In use only when the speed control
is active (DI3 = 0)
3)
Off = Run Enable off. Drive will not
start or stops. On = Run Enable on.
Normal operation.
4)
Application macros
90
Torque Control macro
Torque Control macro is used in applications in which torque control of the motor is
required. Torque reference is given through analogue input AI2 as a current signal.
By default, 0 mA corresponds to 0 %, and 20 mA to 100 % of the rated motor torque.
The Start/Stop/Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
The Run Enable signal is connected to DI6.
Through digital input DI3 it is possible to select speed control instead of torque
control. It is also possible to change the external control location to local (i.e. to
control panel) by pressing the LOC/REM key. The panel controls the speed by
default. If torque control with panel is required, the value of parameter 11.01 should
be changed to REF2 (%).
default signals on the display of the control panel are SPEED, TORQUE and CTRL
LOC.
Application macros
91
The figure below shows the external control connections for the Torque Control
macro. The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
X20
2 GND 1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm
X21
1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm 2 GND
3 AI1+ Speed reference. 0(2) 10 V, R
in
>
200 kohm 4 AI1-
5 AI2+ Torque reference. 0(4) 20 mA, R
in
= 100
ohm 6 AI2-
in
=
100 ohm 8 AI3-
speed, R
L
< 700 ohm 10 AO1-
nom. current, R
L
< 700 ohm 12 AO2-
X22
1 DI1 Stop/Start
2 DI2 Forward/Reverse
3 DI3 Speed / torque control select
1)
2)
5 DI5 Acceleration & deceleration select
3)
6 DI6 Run Enable
4)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
5)
X23
X25
Ready
2 RO12
3 RO13
X26
Running
2 RO22
3 RO23
X27
Inverted fault
2 R032
3 R033
=
=
Fault
1)
Selection between external control
locations EXT1 and EXT2
2)
In use only when the speed control
is active (DI3 = 0)
3)
Off = Ramp times according to par.
22.02 and 22.03. On = Ramp times
4)
Off = Run Enable off. Drive will not
start or stops. On = Run Enable on.
Normal operation.
5)
A
rpm
Application macros
92
Sequential Control macro
This macro offers seven preset constant speeds which can be activated by digital
inputs DI4 to DI6. Two acceleration/deceleration ramps are preset. The acceleration
and deceleration ramps are applied according to the state of digital input DI3. The
Start/Stop and Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
External speed reference can be given through analogue input AI1. The reference is
active only when all of the digital inputs DI4 to DI6 are 0 VDC. Giving operational
commands and setting reference is possible also from the control panel.
Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks.
Default stop mode is ramp. The default signals on the display of the control panel are
FREQUENCY, CURRENT and POWER.
Operation diagram
The figure below shows an example of the use of the macro.
Accel1 Accel1 Accel2 Decel2
Speed 3
Speed 2
Speed 1
Speed
Time
Start/Stop
Accel1/Decel1
Speed 1
Speed 2
Accel2/Decel2
Speed 3
Stop with
deceleration
ramp
Application macros
93
The figure below shows the external control connections for the Sequential Control
macro. The markings of the standard I/O terminals on the RMIO board are shown.
A
rpm
X20
2 GND 1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm
X21
1 kohm < R
L
< 10 kohm 2 GND
3 AI1+ External speed reference 0(2) 10 V, R
in
>
200 kohm 4 AI1-
in
=
100 ohm 6 AI2-
in
=
100 ohm 8 AI3-
speed, R
L
< 700 ohm 10 AO1-
nom. current, R
L
< 700 ohm 12 AO2-
X22
1 DI1 Stop/Start
2 DI2 Forward/Reverse
3 DI3 Acceleration & deceleration selection
1)
2)
2)
2)
7 +24 V +24 VDC, max. 100 mA
8 +24 V
3)
X23
X25
Ready
2 RO12
3 RO13
X26
Running
2 RO22
3 RO23
X27
Inverted fault
2 R032
3 R033
=
=
Fault
1)
Off = Ramp times according to par.
22.02 and 22.03. On = Ramp times
2)
See parameter group 12
CONSTANT SPEEDS:
3)
DI4 DI5 DI6 Operation
0 0 0 Set speed through AI1
1 0 0 Speed 1
0 1 0 Speed 2
1 1 0 Speed 3
0 0 1 Speed 4
1 0 1 Speed 5
0 1 1 Speed 6
1 1 1 Speed 7
Application macros
94
User macros
In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to create two user
macros. The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including
Group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory, and
recall the data at a later time. The panel reference and the control location setting
(Local or Remote) are also saved.
To create User Macro 1:
Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if not performed yet.
Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification by
changing parameter 99.02 to USER 1 SAVE (press ENTER). The storing takes 20
s to 1 min.
To recall the user macro:
Change parameter 99.02 to USER 1 LOAD.
Press ENTER to load.
The user macro can also be switched via digital inputs (see parameter 16.05).
Note: User macro load restores also the motor settings in group 99 START-UP
DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that the settings correspond
to the motor used.
Example: The user can switch the drive between two motors without having to
adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the
motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor
identification once for both motors and then to save the data as two user macros.
When the motor is changed, only the corresponding User macro needs to be loaded,
and the drive is ready to operate.
95
Chapter overview
The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus
equivalent values for each signal/parameter. More data is given in chapter Additional
data: actual signals and parameters.
Terms and abbreviations
Term Definition
Absolute Maximum
Frequency
Value of 20.08, or 20.07 if the absolute value of the minimum limit is
greater than the maximum limit.
Absolute Maximum
Speed
Value of parameter 20.02, or 20.01 if the absolute value of the minimum
limit is higher than the maximum limit.
Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the
user. No user setting possible.
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel
and the integer used in serial communication.
Parameter A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive.
96
No. Name/Value Description FbEq
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Basic signals for monitoring of the drive.
01.01 PROCESS VARIABLE Process variable based on settings in parameter group 34 PROCESS
VARIABLE.
1 = 1
01.02 SPEED Calculated motor speed in rpm. Filter time setting by parameter 34.04. -2000 = -
100% 2000 =
100% of motor
abs. max.
speed
01.03 FREQUENCY Calculated drive output frequency. -100 = -1 Hz
100 = 1 Hz
01.04 CURRENT Measured motor current. 10 = 1 A
01.05 TORQUE Calculated motor torque. 100 is the motor nominal torque. Filter time
setting by parameter 34.05.
-10000 = -
100% 10000 =
100% of motor
nom. torque
01.06 POWER Motor power. 100 is the nominal power. 0 = 0% 1000 =
100% of motor
nom. power
01.07 DC BUS VOLTAGE V Measured intermediate circuit voltage. 1 = 1 V
01.08 MAINS VOLTAGE Calculated supply voltage. 1 = 1 V
01.09 OUTPUT VOLTAGE Calculated motor voltage. 1 = 1 V
01.10 ACS 800 TEMP Temperature of the heatsink. 1 = 1 C
01.11 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 in rpm. (Hz if value of parameter 99.04 is
SCALAR.)
1 = 1 rpm
01.12 EXTERNAL REF 2 External reference REF2. Depending on the use, 100% is the motor
maximum speed, motor nominal torque, or maximum process
reference.
0 = 0% 10000
= 100% 1)
01.13 CTRL LOCATION Active control location. (1,2) LOCAL; (3) EXT1; (4) EXT2. See the
chapter Program features.
See Descr.
01.14 OP HOUR COUNTER Elapsed time counter. Runs when the control board is powered. 1 = 1 h
01.15 KILOWATT HOURS kWh counter. 1 = 100 kWh
01.16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT Application block output signal. E.g. the process PID controller output
when the PID Control macro is active.
0 = 0% 10000
= 100%
01.17 DI6-1 STATUS Status of digital inputs. Example: 0000001 = DI1 is on, DI2 to DI6 are
off.
01.18 AI1 [V] Value of analogue input AI1. 1 = 0.001 V
01.19 AI2 [mA] Value of analogue input AI2. 1 = 0.001 mA
01.20 AI3 [mA] Value of analogue input AI3. 1 = 0.001 mA
01.21 RO3-1 STATUS Status of relay outputs. Example: 001 = RO1 is energised, RO2 and
RO3 are de-energised.
01.22 AO1 [mA] Value of analogue output AO1. 1 =0.001 mA
97
01.23 AO2 [mA] Value of analogue output AO2. 1 = 0.001 mA
01.24 ACTUAL VALUE 1 Feedback signal for the process PID controller. Updated only when
parameter 99.02 = PD CTRL
0 = 0% 10000
= 100%
01.25 ACTUAL VALUE 2 Feedback signal for the process PID controller. Updated only when
parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
0 = 0% 10000
= 100%
01.26 CONTROL DEVIATION Deviation of the process PID controller, i.e. the difference between the
reference value and the actual value. Updated only when parameter
99.02 = PID CTRL.
-10000 = -
100% 10000 =
100%
01.27 APPLICATION MACRO Active application macro (value of parameter 99.02). See 99.02
01.28 EXT AO1 [mA] Value of output 1 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional). 1 = 0.001 mA
01.29 EXT AO2 [mA] Value of output 2 of the analogue I/O extension module (optional). 1 = 0.001 mA
01.30 PP 1 TEMP IGBT maximum temperature in inverter no. 1 (used only in high power
units with parallel inverters).
1 = 1 C
1 = 1 C
1 = 1 C
1 = 1 C
01.34 ACTUAL VALUE Process PID controller actual value. See parameter 40.06. 0 = 0% 10000
= 100%
01.35 MOTOR 1 TEMP Measured temperature of motor 1. See parameter 35.01. 1 = 1 C
01.36 MOTOR 2 TEMP Measured temperature of motor 2. See parameter 35.04. 1 = 1 C
01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST Estimated motor temperature. 1 = 1 C
01.38 AI5 [mA] Value of analogue input AI5 read from AI1 of the analogue I/O
extension module (optional). A voltage signal is also displayed in mA
(instead of V).
1 = 0.001 mA
01.39 AI6 [mA] Value of analogue input AI6 read from AI2 of the analogue I/O
extension module (optional).

A voltage signal is also displayed in mA
(instead of V).
1 = 0.001 mA
01.40 DI7-12 STATUS Status of digital inputs DI7 to DI12 read from the digital I/O extension
modules (optional). E.g. value 000001: DI7 is on, DI8 to DI12 are off.
1 = 1
01.41 EXT RO STATUS Status of the relay outputs on the digital I/O extension modules
(optional). E.g. value 0000001: RO1 of module 1 is energised. Other
relay outputs are de-energised.
1 = 1
01.42 PROCESS SPEED REL Motor actual speed in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed. If
parameter 99.04 is SCALAR, the value is the relative actual output
frequency.
1 = 1
01.43 MOTOR RUN TIME Motor run time counter. The counter runs when the inverter modulates.
Can be reset by parameter 34.06.
1 = 10 h
01.44 FAN ON-TIME Running time of the drive cooling fan.
Note: The counter can be reset by the DriveWindow PC tool. Resetting
is recommended when the fan is replaced.
01.45 CTRL BOARD TEMP Control board temperature.
98
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Speed and torque reference monitoring signals.
02.01 SPEED REF 2 Limited speed reference. 100% corresponds to the Absolute Maximum
Speed of the motor.
0 = 0% 20000
= 100% of
motor
absolute max.
speed
02.02 SPEED REF 3 Ramped and shaped speed reference. 100% corresponds to the
Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor.
20000 = 100%
02.09 TORQ REF 2 Speed controller output. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal
torque.
0 = 0% 10000
= 100% of
motor nominal
torque
02.10 TORQ REF 3 Torque reference. 100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque. 10000 = 100%
02.13 TORQ USED REF Torque reference after frequency, voltage and torque limiters. 100%
corresponds to the motor nominal torque.
10000 = 100%
02.14 FLUX REF Flux reference in percent. 10000 = 100%
02.17 SPEED ESTIMATED Estimated motor speed. 100% corresponds to the Absolute Maximum
Speed of the motor.
20000 = 100%
02.18 SPEED MEASURED Measured motor actual speed (zero when no encoder is used). 100%
corresponds to the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor.
20000 = 100%
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Data words for monitoring of fieldbus communication (each signal is a
16-bit data word).
2)
03.01 MAIN CTRL WORD A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.03 AUX STATUS WORD A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.05 FAULT WORD 1 A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.07 SYSTEM FAULT A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.08 ALARM WORD 1 A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.11 FOLLOWER MCW A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.12 INT FAULT INFO A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.13 AUX STATUS WORD 3 A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
03.14 AUX STATUS WORD 4 A 16-bit data word. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
3.20 LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing for the
codes.
3.21 2. LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest fault.
3.22 3. LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest fault.
3.23 4. LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 4th latest fault.
3.24 5. LATEST FAULT Fieldbus code of the 5th latest fault.
99
1) Percent of motor maximum speed / nominal torque / maximum process reference (depending on the
ACS800 macro selected).
2) The contents of these data words are detailed in the chapter Fieldbus control. For the contents of
Actual Signal 3.11, see the Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFE 64590430 [English]).
3.25 LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the latest warning.
3.26 2. LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 2nd latest warning.
3.27 3. LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 3rd latest warning.
3.28 4. LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 4th latest warning.
3.29 5. LATEST WARNING Fieldbus code of the 5th latest warning.
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Signals for the Adaptive Program
09.01 AI1 SCALED Value of analogue input AI1 scaled to an integer value. 20000 = 10 V
09.02 AI2 SCALED Value of analogue input AI2 scaled to an integer value. 20000 = 20
mA
mA
mA
mA
09.06 DS MCW Control Word (CW) of the Main Reference Dataset received from the
master station through the fieldbus interface
0 ... 65535
(Decimal)
09.07 MASTER REF1 Reference 1 (REF1) of the Main Reference Dataset received from the
-32768
32767
09.08 MASTER REF2 Reference 2 (REF2) of the Main Reference Dataset received from the
-32768
32767
09.09 AUX DS VAL1 Reference 3 (REF3) of the Auxiliary Reference Dataset received from
the master station through the fieldbus interface
-32768
32767
-32768
32767
-32768
32767
100
Index Name/Selection Description FbEq
10 START/STOP/DIR
The sources for external start, stop and direction control
10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction
commands for external control location 1 (EXT1).
NOT SEL No start, stop and direction command source. 1
DI1 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop; 1 = start. Direction is fixed
according to parameter 10.3 DIRECTION.
WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is
on.
2
DI1,2 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. Direction through
digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03
DIRECTION must be REQUEST.
WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is
on.
3
DI1P,2P Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital
input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter
10.03 DIRECTION.
4
DI1P,2P,3 Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. Pulse stop through digital
input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction through digital input DI3. 0 = forward, 1 =
reverse. To control direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be
REQUEST.
5
DI1P,2P,3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start forward. Pulse start
reverse through digital input DI2. 0 -> 1: Start reverse. Pulse stop through
digital input DI3. 1 -> 0: stop. To control the direction, parameter 10.03
DIRECTION must be REQUEST.
6
DI6 See selection DI1. 7
DI6,5 See selection DI1,2. DI6: Start/stop, DI5: direction. 8
KEYPAD Control panel. To control the direction, parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be
REQUEST.
9
COMM.CW Fieldbus Control Word. 10
DI7,8 See selection DI1,2. 12
DI7P,8P See selection DI1P,2P. 13
DI7P,8P,9 See selection DI1P,2P,3. 14
DI7P,8P,9P See selection DI1P,2P,3P. 15
PARAM 10.04 Source selected by 10.04 16
DI1 F DI2 R Start, stop and direction commands through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.
Note: Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION must be REQUEST.
17
10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR Defines the connections and the source of the start, stop and direction
commands for external control location 2 (EXT2).
DI1 DI2 Operation
0 0 Stop
1 0 Start forward
0 1 Start reverse
1 1 Stop
101
NOT SEL See parameter 10.01. 1
DI1 See parameter 10.01. 2
DI1,2 See parameter 10.01. 3
DI1P,2P See parameter 10.01. 4
DI1P,2P,3 See parameter 10.01. 5
DI1P,2P,3P See parameter 10.01. 6
KEYPAD See parameter 10.01. 9
COMM.CW See parameter 10.01. 10
DI7P,8P See parameter 10.01. 13
DI7P,8P,9 See parameter 10.01. 14
DI7P,8P,9P See parameter 10.01. 15
PARAM 10.05 Source selected by 10.05. 16
DI1 F DI2 R See parameter 10.01. 17
10.03 DIRECTION Enables the control of direction of rotation of the motor, or fixes the direction.
FORWARD Fixed to forward 1
REVERSE Fixed to reverse 2
REQUEST Direction of rotation control allowed 3
10.04 EXT 1 STRT PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10.04 of parameter 10.01.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
Parameter index or a constant value:
- Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is
effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs.
- Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value
C to enable the constant setting.
-
10.05 EXT 2 STRT PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 10.05 of parameter 10.02.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
Parameter index or a constant value. See Parameter 10.04 for information on
the difference.
-
10.06 JOG SPEED SELECT Defines the signal that activates jogging function. The operation of the jogging
is explained in the chapter Program features.
NOT SEL Not selected.
DI3 Digital input DI3. 0 = Jogging is inactive. 1 = Jogging is active.
DI4 See DI3.
DI5 See DI3.
DI6 See DI3.
DI7 See DI3.
DI8 See DI3.
DI9 See DI3.
DI10 See DI3.
DI11 See DI3.
102
DI12 See DI3.
10.07 NET CONTROL When active, fieldbus overrides the selection of parameter 10.01. Fieldbus
Control Word (except bit 11) is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active
control location.
Note: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected
(98.07).
Note: The setting is not saved in the permanent memory (will reset to zero
when power is switched off).
0 Inactive
1 Active
10.08 NET REFERENCE When active, fieldbus overrides the selection of parameter 11.03. Fieldbus
reference REF1 is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active control
location.
Note: Only visible with the Generic Drive communication profile selected
(98.07).
Note: The setting is not saved in the permanent memory (will reset to zero
when power is switched off).
0 Inactive
1 Active
11 REFERENCE
SELECT
Panel reference type, external control location selection and external reference
sources and limits
11.01 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the type of the reference given from panel.
REF1(rpm) Speed reference in rpm. (Frequency reference (Hz) if parameter 99.04 is
SCALAR.)
1
REF2(%) %-reference. The use of REF2 vary depending on the application macro. For
example, if the Torque Control macro is selected, REF2 is the torque
reference.
2
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects between
the two external control locations, EXT1 or EXT2.
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = EXT1, 1 = EXT2. 1
EXT1 EXT1 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10.01 and
11.03.
7
EXT2 EXT2 active. The control signal sources are defined by parameter 10.02 and
11.06.
8
COMM.CW(11) Fieldbus Control Word, bit 11. 9
103
PARAM 11.09 Source selected by parameter 11.09. 16
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1
KEYPAD Control panel. The first line on the display shows the reference value. 1
AI1 Analogue input AI1.
Note: If the signal is bipolar (10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. (The
selection AI1 ignores the negative signal range.)
2
AI2 Analogue input AI2. 3
AI3 Analogue input AI3. 4
AI1/JOYST Unipolar analogue input AI1 as joystick. The minimum input signal runs the
motor at the maximum reference in the reverse direction, the maximum input at
the maximum reference in the forward direction.
Note: Parameter 10.03 must have the value REQUEST.
WARNING! Minimum reference for joystick must be higher than 0.5 V.
Set parameter 13.01 to 2 V or to a value higher than 0.5 V and
analogue signal loss detection parameter 30.01 to FAULT. The drive
will stop in case the control signal is lost.
Note: If the signal is bipolar (10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. The
selection AI1/JOYST ignores the negative signal range.
5
AI2/JOYST See AI1/JOYST. 6
AI1+AI3 Summation of analogue input AI1 and AI3 7
AI1-AI3 Subtraction of analogue input AI1 and AI3 9
AI1*AI3 Multiplication of analogue input AI1 and AI3 11
MIN(AI1,AI3) Minimum of analogue input AI1 and AI3 13
MIN(AI2,AI3) Minimum of analogue input AI2 and AI3 14
MAX(AI1,AI3) Maximum of analogue input AI1 and AI3 15
MAX(AI2,AI3) Maximum of analogue input AI2 and AI3 16
0
10 6 2
AI1
Speed Reference (REF1)
11.04
-11.04
-11.05
11.05
Par. 13.01 = 2 V, Par 13.02 = 10 V
104
DI3U,4D(R) Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: Reference decrease.
Stop command or power switch off resets the reference to zero. Parameter
22.04 defines the rate of the reference change.
17
DI3U,4D Digital input 3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: Reference decrease. The
program stores the active speed reference (not reset by a stop command or
power switch-off). Parameter 22.04 defines the rate of the reference change.
18
DI5U,6D See DI3U,4D. 19
COMM. REF Fieldbus reference REF1 20
COM.REF1+AI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF1 and analogue input AI1 21
COM.REF1*AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analogue input AI1 22
FAST COMM As with the selection COMM. REF, except the following differences:
- shorter communication cycle time when transferring the reference to the core
motor control program (6 ms -> 2 ms)
- the direction cannot be controlled through interfaces defined by parameters
10.01 or 10.02, nor with the control panel.
- parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS is not effective
Note: If any of the following selections is true, the selection is not effective.
Instead, the operation is according to COMM. REF.
- parameter 99.02 is PID
- parameter 99.04 is SCALAR
- parameter 40.14 has value PROPORTIONAL or DIRECT
23
COM.REF1+AI5 See selection COM.REF1+AI1 (AI5 used instead of AI1). 24
COM.REF1*AI5 See selection COM.REF1*AI1 (AI5 used instead of AI1). 25
AI5 Analogue input AI5 26
MIN(AI5,6) Lower of analogue input AI5 and AI6 33
MAX(AI5,6) Higher of analogue input AI5 and AI6 34
DI11U,12D(R) See DI3U,4D(R). 35
DI11U,12D See DI3U,4D. 36
105
AI1 BIPOLAR Bipolar analogue input AI1 (-10 10 V). The figure below illustrates the use of
the input as the speed reference.
38
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the source signal used.
0 18000 rpm Setting range in rpm. (Hz if parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.)
Example: Analogue input AI1 is selected as the reference source (value of
parameter 11.03 is AI1). The reference minimum and maximum correspond
the AI minimum and maximum settings as follows:
Note: If the reference is given through fieldbus, the scaling differs from that of
an analogue signal. See the chapter Fieldbus control for more information.
1 18000
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal.
S
p
e
e
d

R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
minAI1 = 13.01 MINIMUM AI1
maxAI1 = 13.02 MAXIMUM Ai1
scaled maxREF1 = 13.03 SCALE AI1 x 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM
minREF1 = 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM
scaled
minREF1
-minAI1 minAI1 maxAI1 -maxAI1
-minREF1
-scaled
Analogue Input Signal
Operation Range
maxREF1
maxREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST
AI1 Range
EXT REF1 Range
1 parameter 13.01
2 parameter 13.02
1 parameter 11.04
2 parameter 11.05
1 2
1
2
106
0 18000 rpm Setting range. (Hz if value of parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.)
1 18000
11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2. REF2 is a
- speed reference in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed if parameter
99.02 = FACTORY, HAND/AUTO or SEQ CTRL.
- torque reference in percent of the motor nominal torque if parameter 99.02 =
TORQUE.
- process reference in percent of the maximum process quantity if parameter
99.02 = PID CTRL.
- frequency reference in percent of the Absolute Maximum Frequency if
parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
KEYPAD See parameter 11.03. 1
AI1 See parameter 11.03.
Note: If the signal is bipolar (10 VDC), use the selection AI1 BIPOLAR. The
selection AI1 ignores the negative signal range.
2
AI2 See parameter 11.03. 3
AI1/JOYST See parameter 11.03. 5
AI1+AI3 See parameter 11.03. 7
AI1-AI3 See parameter 11.03. 9
AI1*AI3 See parameter 11.03. 11
MIN(AI1,AI3) See parameter 11.03. 13
MIN(AI2,AI3) See parameter 11.03. 14
MAX(AI1,AI3) See parameter 11.03. 15
MAX(AI2,AI3) See parameter 11.03. 16
DI3U,4D(R) See parameter 11.03. 17
DI3U,4D See parameter 11.03. 18
COMM. REF See parameter 11.03. 20
COM.REF2+AI1 See parameter 11.03. 21
COM.REF2*AI1 See parameter 11.03. 22
FAST COMM See parameter 11.03. 23
COM.REF2+AI5 See parameter 11.03. 24
COM.REF2*AI5 See parameter 11.03. 25
107
MIN(AI5,6) See parameter 11.03. 33
MAX(AI5,6) See parameter 11.03. 34
DI11U,12D(R) See parameter 11.03. 35
AI1 BIPOLAR See parameter 11.03. 38
11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the source signal used.
0 100% Setting range in percent. Correspondence to the source signal limits:
- Source is an analogue input: See example for parameter 11.04.
- Source is a serial link: See the chapter Fieldbus control.
0 10000
11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 (absolute value).
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the source signal used.
0 600% Setting range. Correspondence to the source signal limits:
- Source is an analogue input: See parameter 11.04.
- Source is a serial link: See the chapter Fieldbus control.
0 6000
11.09 EXT 1/2 SEL PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.09 of parameter 11.02.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
11.10 EXT 1 REF PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.10 of parameter 11.03.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
11.11 EXT 2 REF PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 11.11 of parameter 11.06.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS
Constant speed selection and values. An active constant speed overrides the
drive speed reference.
Note: If parameter 99.04 is SCALAR, only speeds 1 to 5 and speed 15 are in
use.
12.01 CONST SPEED SEL Activates the constant speeds or selects the activation signal.
NOT SEL No constant speeds in use 1
DI1(SPEED1) Speed defined by parameter 12.02 is activated through digital input DI1.
1 = active, 0 = inactive.
2
3
4
5
6
108
7
DI1,2 Constant speed selection through digital input DI1 and DI2. 8
DI1,2,3 Constant speed selection through digital input DI1, DI2 and DI3. 11
DI3,4,5 See selection DI1,2,3. 12
DI4,5,6 See selection DI1,2,3. 13
DI3,4,5,6 Constant speed selection through digital input DI3, 4, 5 and 6 14
15
16
17
DI1 DI2 Constant speed in use
0 0 No constant speed
1 0 Speed defined by parameter 12.02
DI1 DI2 DI3 Constant speed in use
0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 Speed defined by parameter 12.02
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 Constant speed in use
0 0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 0 Speed defined by parameter 12.02
109
18
19
DI12 (SPEED6) Speed defined by parameter 12.07 is activated through digital input DI12.
20
12.02 CONST SPEED 1 Defines speed 1. An absolute value. Does not include the direction information.
0 18000 rpm Setting range 0 18000
12.11 CONST SPEED 10 Defines speed 10. An absolute value. Does not include the direction
information.
information.
information.
Note: If inching is in use, the parameter defines the inching 1 speed. The sign
is taken into account. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
-18000 18000 rpm Setting range. -18000
18000
information.
Note: If inching is in use, the parameter defines the inching 2 speed. The sign
is taken into account. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
-18000 18000 rpm Setting range -18000
18000
110
information.
Note: If the jogging function is in use, the parameter defines the jogging speed.
The sign is not taken into account. See the chapter Program features.
12.16 CONST SPEED 15 Defines speed 15 or Fault speed. The program considers the sign when used
as a fault speed by parameter 30.01 and 30.02.
-18000 18000 rpm Setting range -18000
18000
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
The analogue input signal processing
13.01 MINIMUM AI1 Defines the minimum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference,
the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting.
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this
value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.04.
0 V Zero volts. Note: The program cannot detect a loss of analogue input signal. 1
2 V Two volts 2
TUNED VALUE The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE. 3
TUNE The value measurement triggering. Procedure:
- Connect the minimum signal to input.
- Set the parameter to TUNE.
Note: The readable range in tuning is -10 10 V.
4
13.02 MAXIMUM AI1 Defines the maximum value for analogue input AI1. When used as a reference,
the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting.
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external reference REF1, this
value corresponds to the value of parameter 11.05.
10 V Ten volts (DC). 1
TUNED VALUE The value measured by the tuning function. See the selection TUNE. 2
TUNE Triggering of the tuning function. Procedure:
- Connect the maximum signal to input.
- Set the parameter to TUNE.
Note: The readable range in tuning is 0 10 V.
3
111
13.03 SCALE AI1 Scales analogue input AI1.
Example: The effect on speed reference REF1 when:
- REF1 source selection (Parameter 11.03) = AI1+AI3
- REF1 maximum value setting (Parameter 11.05) = 1500 rpm
- Actual AI1 value = 4 V (40% of the full scale value)
- Actual AI3 value = 12 mA (60% of the full scale value)
- AI1 scaling = 100%, AI3 scaling = 10%
0 100% Scaling range 0 10000
13.04 FILTER AI1 Defines the filter time constant for analogue input AI1.
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface hardware (10 ms
time constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter.
0.00 10.00 s Filter time constant 0 1000
13.05 INVERT AI1 Activates/deactivates the inversion of analogue input AI1.
NO No inversion 0
YES Inversion active. The maximum value of the analogue input signal corresponds
to the minimum reference and vice versa.
65535
13.06 MINIMUM AI2 See parameter 13.01.
0 mA See parameter 13.01. 1
TUNED VALUE See parameter 13.01. 3
TUNE See parameter 13.01. 4
13.07 MAXIMUM AI2 See parameter 13.02.
60%
40%
150 rpm 1500 rpm 10 V
0 V 0 mA
20 mA 1500 rpm
600 rpm
90 rpm
690 rpm
0 rpm
AI1 AI3 AI1 + AI3
63
%
100
T
t
Filtered Signal
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 - e
-t/T
)
I = filter input (step)
O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant
112
13.08 SCALE AI2 See parameter 13.03.
0 100% See parameter 13.03. 0 10000
13.09 FILTER AI2 See parameter 13.04.
0.00 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 1000
13.10 INVERT AI2 See parameter 13.05.
NO See parameter 13.05. 0
YES See parameter 13.05. 65535
0 100% See parameter 13.03. 0 10000
0.00 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 1000
0 100% See parameter 13.03. 0 10000
0.00 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 1000
113
0 100% See parameter 13.03. 0 10000
0.00 10.00 s See parameter 13.04. 0 1000
14 RELAY OUTPUTS
Status information indicated through the relay outputs, and the relay operating
delays
14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO1. The relay energises
when the status meets the setting.
NOT USED Not used. 1
READY Ready to function: Run Enable signal on, no fault. 2
RUNNING Running: Start signal on, Run Enable signal on, no active fault. 3
FAULT Fault 4
FAULT(-1) Inverted fault. Relay is de-energised on a fault trip. 5
FAULT(RST) Fault. Automatic reset after the autoreset delay. See parameter group 31
AUTOMATIC RESET.
6
STALL WARN Warning by the stall protection function. See parameter 30.10. 7
STALL FLT Fault trip by the stall protection function. See parameter 30.10. 8
MOT TEMP WRN Warning trip of the motor temperature supervision function. See parameter
30.04.
9
MOT TEMP FLT Fault trip of the motor temperature supervision function. See parameter 30.04. 10
ACS TEMP WRN Warning by the drive temperature supervision function: 115 C (239 F). 11
ACS TEMP FLT Fault trip by the drive temperature supervision function: 125 C (257 F). 12
FAULT/WARN Fault or warning active 13
WARNING Warning active 14
REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction. 15
EXT CTRL Drive is under external control. 16
REF 2 SEL External reference REF 2 is in use. 17
CONST SPEED A constant speed is in use. See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS. 18
DC OVERVOLT The intermediate circuit DC voltage has exceeded the overvoltage limit. 19
114
DC UNDERVOLT The intermediate circuit DC voltage has fallen below the undervoltage limit. 20
SPEED 1 LIM Motor speed at supervision limit 1. See parameters 32.01 and 32.02. 21
SPEED 2 LIM Motor speed at supervision limit 2. See parameters 32.03 and 32.04. 22
CURRENT LIM Motor current at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.05 and 32.06. 23
REF 1 LIM External reference REF1 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.11 and
32.12.
24
REF 2 LIM External reference REF2 at the supervision limit. See parameters 32.13 and
32.14.
25
TORQUE 1 LIM Motor torque at supervision limit 1. See parameters 32.07 and 32.08. 26
TORQUE 2 LIM Motor torque at supervision limit 2. See parameters 32.09 and 32.10. 27
STARTED The drive has received the start command. 28
LOSS OF REF The drive has no reference. 29
AT SPEED The actual value has reached the reference value. In speed control, the speed
error is less or equal to 10% of the nominal motor speed.
30
ACT 1 LIM Process PID controller variable ACT1 at the supervision limit. See parameters
32.15 and 32.16.
31
ACT 2 LIM Process PID controller variable ACT2 at the supervision limit. See parameters
32.17 and 32.18.
32
COMM.REF3(13) The relay is controlled by fieldbus reference REF3. See the chapter Fieldbus
control.
33
BRAKE CTRL On/Off control of a mechanical brake. See parameter group 42 BRAKE
CONTROL.
35
BC SHORT CIR Drive is tripped to a brake chopper fault. See the chapter Fault tracing. 36
14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO2. The relay
energises when the status meets the setting.
NOT USED See parameter 14.01. 1
READY See parameter 14.01. 2
RUNNING See parameter 14.01. 3
FAULT See parameter 14.01. 4
FAULT(-1) See parameter 14.01. 5
FAULT(RST) See parameter 14.01. 6
STALL WARN See parameter 14.01. 7
STALL FLT See parameter 14.01. 8
MOT TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 9
MOT TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 10
ACS TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 11
ACS TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 12
FAULT/WARN See parameter 14.01. 13
WARNING See parameter 14.01. 14
REVERSED See parameter 14.01. 15
EXT CTRL See parameter 14.01. 16
REF 2 SEL See parameter 14.01. 17
CONST SPEED See parameter 14.01. 18
115
DC OVERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 19
DC UNDERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 20
SPEED 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 21
CURRENT LIM See parameter 14.01. 23
REF 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 24
TORQUE 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 26
STARTED See parameter 14.01. 28
LOSS OF REF See parameter 14.01. 29
AT SPEED See parameter 14.01. 30
ACT 1 LIM See parameter 14.01. 31
ACT 2 LIM See parameter 14.01. 32
COMM. REF3(14) See parameter 14.01. 33
BRAKE CTRL See parameter 14.01. 35
BC SHORT CIR See parameter 14.01. 36
14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT Selects the drive status to be indicated through relay output RO3. The relay
energises when the status meets the setting.
FAULT(-1) See parameter 14.01. 5
FAULT(RST) See parameter 14.01. 6
STALL WARN See parameter 14.01. 7
STALL FLT See parameter 14.01. 8
MOT TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 9
MOT TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 10
ACS TEMP WRN See parameter 14.01. 11
ACS TEMP FLT See parameter 14.01. 12
FAULT/WARN See parameter 14.01. 13
REVERSED See parameter 14.01. 15
EXT CTRL See parameter 14.01. 16
CONST SPEED See parameter 14.01. 18
DC OVERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 19
DC UNDERVOLT See parameter 14.01. 20
116
CURRENT LIM See parameter 14.01. 23
STARTED See parameter 14.01. 28
LOSS OF REF See parameter 14.01. 29
MAGN READY The motor is magnetised and ready to give nominal torque (nominal
magnetising of the motor has been reached).
31
USER 2 SEL User Macro 2 is in use. 32
COMM. REF3(15) See parameter 14.01. 33
BRAKE CTRL See parameter 14.01. 35
BC SHORT CIR See parameter 14.01. 36
14.04 RO1 TON DELAY Defines the operation delay for the relay RO1.
0.0 3600.0 s Setting range. The figure below illustrates the operation (on) and release (off)
delays for relay output RO1.
0 36000
14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY Defines the release delay for relay output RO1.
0.0 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 36000
14.06 RO2 TON DELAY Defines the operation delay for relay output RO2.
0.0 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 36000
14.07 RO2 TOFF DELAY Defines the release delay for relay output RO2.
0.0 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 36000
14.08 RO3 TON DELAY Defines the operation delay for relay output RO3.
0.0 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 36000
14.09 RO3 TOFF DELAY Defines the release delay of relay output RO3.
0.0 3600.0 s See parameter 14.04. 0 36000
14.10 DIO MOD1 RO1 Selects the drive status indicated through relay output RO1 of digital I/O
extension module 1 (optional, see parameter 98.03).
1
0
1
0
time
t
On
t
Off
t
On
t
Off
t
On
14.04
t
Off
14.05
Drive status
RO1 status
117
extension module no. 3 (optional, see parameter 98.05).
118
14.16 RO PTR1 Defines the source or constant for value PAR 14.16 of parameter 14.01.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
15 ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through the analogue outputs.
Output signal processing.
15.01 ANALOGUE
OUTPUT1
Connects a drive signal to analogue output AO1.
NOT USED Not in use 1
119
P SPEED Value of a user-defined process quantity derived from the motor speed. See
parameter group 34 PROCESS VARIABLE for scaling and unit selection (%;
m/s; rpm). The updating interval is 100 ms.
2
SPEED Motor speed. 20 mA = motor nominal speed. The updating interval is 24 ms. 3
FREQUENCY Output frequency. 20 mA = motor nominal frequency. The updating interval is
24 ms.
4
CURRENT Output current. 20 mA = motor nominal current. The updating interval is 24 ms. 5
TORQUE Motor torque. 20 mA = 100% of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is
24 ms.
6
POWER Motor power. 20 mA = 100% of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is
100 ms.
7
DC BUS VOLT DC bus voltage. 20 mA = 100% of the reference value. The reference value is
540 VDC. ( = 1.35 400 V) for 380 ... 415 VAC supply voltage rating and
675 VDC ( = 1.35 500 V) for 380 ... 500 VAC supply. The updating interval is
24 ms.
8
OUTPUT VOLT Motor voltage. 20 mA = motor rated voltage. The updating interval is 100 ms. 9
APPL OUTPUT The reference which is given as an output from the application. For example, if
the PID Control macro is in use, this is the output of the process PID controller.
The updating interval is 24 ms.
10
REFERENCE Active reference that the drive is currently following. 20 mA = 100 % of the
active reference. The updating interval is 24 ms.
11
CONTROL DEV The difference between the reference and the actual value of the process PID
controller. 0/4 mA = -100%, 10/12 mA = 0%, 20 mA = 100%. The updating
interval is 24 ms.
12
ACTUAL 1 Value of variable ACT1 used in the process PID control. 20 mA = value of
parameter 40.10. The updating interval is 24 ms.
13
ACTUAL 2 Value of variable ACT2 used in the process PID control. 20 mA = value of
parameter 40.12. The updating interval is 24 ms.
14
COMM.REF4 The value is read from fieldbus reference REF4. See Fieldbus control. 15
M1 TEMP MEAS Analogue output is a current source in a motor temperature measuring circuit.
Depending on the sensor type, the output is 9.1 mA (Pt 100) or 1.6 mA (PTC).
For more information, see parameter 35.01.
Note: The settings of parameters 15.02 to 15.05 are not effective.
16
15.02 INVERT AO1 Inverts the analogue output AO1 signal. The analogue signal is at the minimum
level when the indicated drive signal is at its maximum level and vice versa.
NO Inversion off 0
YES Inversion on 65535
15.03 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value of the analogue output signal AO1.
0 mA Zero mA 1
4 mA Four mA 2
15.04 FILTER AO1 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1.
120
0.00 10.00 s Filter time constant
Note: Even if you select 0 s as the minimum value, the signal is still filtered
with a time constant of 10 ms due to the signal interface hardware. This cannot
be changed by any parameters.
0 1000
15.05 SCALE AO1 Scales the analogue output AO1 signal.
10 1000% Scaling factor. If the value is 100%, the reference value of the drive signal
corresponds to 20 mA.
Example: The nominal motor current is 7.5 A and the measured maximum
current at maximum load 5 A. The motor current 0 to 5 A needs to be read as 0
to 20 mA analogue signal through AO1. The required settings are:
1. AO1 is set to CURRENT by parameter 15.01.
2. AO1 minimum is set to 0 mA by parameter 15.03.
3. The measured maximum motor current is scaled to correspond to 20 mA
analogue output signal by setting the scaling factor (k) to 150%. The value is
defined as follows: The reference value of the output signal CURRENT is the
motor nominal current i.e. 7.5 A (see parameter 15.01). To make the measured
maximum motor current correspond to 20 mA, it should be scaled equal to the
reference value before it is converted to an analogue output signal. Equation:
k 5 A = 7.5 A => k = 1.5 = 150%
100
10000
15.06 ANALOGUE
OUTPUT2
P SPEED See parameter 15.01. 2
SPEED See parameter 15.01. 3
FREQUENCY See parameter 15.01. 4
CURRENT See parameter 15.01. 5
TORQUE See parameter 15.01. 6
POWER See parameter 15.01. 7
DC BUS VOLT See parameter 15.01. 8
OUTPUT VOLT See parameter 15.01. 9
APPL OUTPUT See parameter 15.01. 10
REFERENCE See parameter 15.01. 11
CONTROL DEV See parameter 15.01. 12
ACTUAL 1 See parameter 15.01. 13
COMM.REF5 The value is read from fieldbus reference REF5. See Fieldbus control. 15
15.07 INVERT AO2 See parameter 15.02.
63
%
100
T
t
Filtered Signal
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 - e
-t/T
)
O = filter output
t = time
121
15.08 MINIMUM AO2 See parameter 15.03.
15.09 FILTER AO2 See parameter 15.04.
0.00 10.00 s See parameter 15.04. 0 1000
15.10 SCALE AO2 See parameter 15.05.
10 1000% See parameter 15.05. 100
10000
15.11 AO1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 15.11 of parameter 15.01. 1000=1 mA
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
15.12 AO2 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 15.12 of parameter 15.06. 1000 =
1 mA
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
16 SYSTEM CTRL
INPUTS
Run Enable, parameter lock etc.
16.01 RUN ENABLE Sets the Run Enable signal on, or selects a source for the external Run Enable
signal. If Run Enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start or stops if it is
running. The stop mode is set by parameter 21.07.
YES Run Enable signal is on. 1
DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Run Enable. 2
COMM.CW(3) External signal required through the Fieldbus Control Word (bit 3). 8
16.02 PARAMETER LOCK Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents parameter changing.
OPEN The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed. 0
LOCKED Locked. Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel. The lock
can be opened by entering the valid code to parameter 16.03.
65535
16.03 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see parameter 16.02).
122
0 30000 Setting 358 opens the lock. The value reverts back to 0 automatically. 0 30000
16.04 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a
fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists.
NOT SEL Fault reset only from the control panel keypad (RESET key). 1
DI1 Reset through digital input DI1 or by control panel:
- If the drive is in external control mode: Reset by a rising edge of DI1.
- If the drive is in local control mode: Reset by the RESET key of the control
panel.
2
COMM.CW(7) Reset through the fieldbus Control Word (bit 7), or by the RESET key of the
control panel.
8
ON STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital input, or by the
RESET key of the control panel.
9
16.05 USER MACRO IO
CHG
Enables the change of the User Macro through a digital input. See parameter
99.02. The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped. During the
change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User Macro by parameter 99.02 after changing any
parameter settings, or reperforming the motor identification. The last settings
saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and
on again or the macro is changed. Any unsaved changes will be lost.
Note: The value of this parameter is not included in the User Macro. A setting
once made remains despite the User Macro change.
Note: Selection of User Macro 2 can be supervised via relay output RO3. See
parameter 14.03 for more information.
NOT SEL User macro change is not possible through a digital input. 1
DI1 Falling edge of digital input DI1: User Macro 1 is loaded into use. Rising edge
of digital input DI1: User Macro 2 is loaded into use.
2
123
16.06 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode (LOC/REM key of the panel).
WARNING! Before activating, ensure that the control panel is not
needed for stopping the drive!
OFF Local control allowed. 0
ON Local control disabled. 65535
16.07 PARAMETER SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory.
Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when
changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection.
DONE Saving completed 0
SAVE.. Saving in progress 1
16.08 RUN ENA PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 16.08 of parameter 16.01
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
16.09 CTRL BOARD
SUPPLY
Defines the source of the control board power supply.
Note: If an external supply is used but this parameter has value INTERNAL,
the drive trips to a fault at power switch off.
INTERNAL 24V Internal (default).
EXTERNAL 24V External. The control board is powered from an external supply.
20 LIMITS
Drive operation limits.
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED Defines the allowed minimum speed. The limit cannot be set if parameter
99.04 = SCALAR.
Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e.
parameter 99.08. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also
change.
-18000 / (no. of pole
pairs) Par. 20.02
rpm
Minimum speed limit.
Note: If the value is positive, the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction.
1 = 1 rpm
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED Defines the allowed maximum speed. The value cannot be set if parameter
99.04 = SCALAR.
Note: The limit is linked to the motor nominal speed setting i.e.
parameter 99.08. If 99.08 is changed, the default speed limit will also
change.
Par. 20.01 18000 /
(no. of pole pairs) rpm
Maximum speed limit 1 = 1 rpm
20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT Defines the allowed maximum motor current.
0.0 x.x A Current limit 0 100x.x
20.04 TORQ MAX LIM1 Defines the maximum torque limit 1 for the drive.
0.0 600.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque. 0 60000
124
20.05 OVERVOLTAGE
CTRL
Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage
control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the
overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque.
Note: If a brake chopper and resistor are connected to the drive, the controller
must be off (selection NO) to allow chopper operation.
OFF Overvoltage control deactivated. 0
ON Overvoltage control activated. 65535
20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE
CTRL
Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the undervoltage controller
will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above
the lower limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load will cause
regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC link charged and preventing
an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop. This will act as a power-loss
ride-through functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as a centrifuge or
a fan.
OFF Undervoltage control deactivated. 0
ON Undervoltage control activated. 65535
20.07 MINIMUM FREQ Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set
only parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
-300.00 50 Hz Minimum frequency limit.
Note: If the value is positive, the motor cannot be run in the reverse direction.
-30000
5000
20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. The limit can be set
only if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR
-50 300.00 Hz Maximum frequency limit -5000
30000
20.11 P MOTORING LIM Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the inverter to the motor.
0 600% Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power 0 60000
20.12 P GENERATING LIM Defines the allowed maximum power fed by the motor to the inverter.
-600 0% Power limit in percent of the motor nominal power -60000 0
20.13 MIN TORQ SEL Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive.
MIN LIM1 Value of parameter 20.15. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0: Value of parameter 20.15. 1: Value of parameter 20.16. 2
125
AI1 Analogue input AI1. See parameter 20.20 on how the signal is converted to a
torque limit.
14
AI2 See selection AI1. 15
PARAM 20.18 Limit given by 20.18 19
NEG MAX TORQ Inverted maximum torque limit defined by parameter 20.14 20
20.14 MAX TORQ SEL Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive.
MAX LIM1 Value of parameter 20.14. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0: Value of parameter 20.04. 1: Value of parameter 20.17. 2
AI1 Analogue input AI1. See parameter 20.20 on how the signal is converted to a
torque limit.
14
PARAM 20.19 Limit given by 20.19 19
20.15 TORQ MIN LIM1 Defines the minimum torque limit 1 for the drive.
-600.0 0.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque -60000 0
20.16 TORQ MIN LIM2 Defines the minimum torque limit 2 for the drive.
-600.0 0.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque -60000 0
20.17 TORQ MAX LIM2 Defines the maximum torque limit 2 for the drive.
0.0 600.0% Value of limit in percent of motor nominal torque 0 60000
20.18 TORQ MIN PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 20.18 of parameter 20.13
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
Parameter index or a constant value. 100 = 1%
20.19 TORQ MAX PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 20.19 of parameter 20.14
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference. FbEq for the torque value is 100 = 1%.
100 = 1%
126
20.20 MIN AI SCALE Defines how an analogue signal (mA or V) is converted to a torque minimum or
maximum limit (%). The figure below illustrate the converting, when analogue
input AI1 has been set the source for a torque limit by parameter 20.13 or
20.14.
0.0 600.0% %-value that correspond to the minimum setting of the analogue input
20.21 MAX AI SCALE See parameter 20.20.
0.0 600.0% %-value that correspond to the maximum setting of the analogue input
21 START/STOP
Start and stop modes of the motor.
21.01 START FUNCTION Selects the motor starting method.
AUTO Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the
flying start function (starting to a rotating machine) and the automatic restart
function (stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor
flux to die away). The drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as
the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all
conditions.
Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, no flying start or automatic restart is
possible by default. The flying start feature needs to be activated separately by
parameter 21.08.
1
DC MAGN DC magnetising should be selected if a high break-away torque is required.
The drive pre-magnetises the motor before the start. The pre-magnetising time
is determined automatically, being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on the
motor size. DC MAGN guarantees the highest possible break-away torque.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is
selected.
Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
2
CNST DC MAGN Constant DC magnetising should be selected instead of DC magnetising if
constant pre-magnetising time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be
simultaneous with a mechanical brake release). This selection also guarantees
the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-magnetising time is set
long enough. The pre-magnetising time is defined by parameter 21.02.
Note: Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is
selected.
Note: DC magnetising cannot be selected if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetising time has
passed although the motor magnetisation is not completed. Ensure
always in applications where a full break-away torque is essential, that
the constant magnetising time is long enough to allow generation of full
magnetisation and torque.
3
20.20
20.21
13.01 13.02
13.01 Minimum setting for AI1
13.02 Maximum setting for AI1
20.20 Minimum torque
20.21 Maximum torque
Torque limit
Analogue signal
127
21.02 CONST MAGN TIME Defines the magnetising time in the constant magnetising mode. See
parameter 21.01. After the start command, the drive automatically pre-
magnetises the motor the set time.
30.0 10000.0 ms Magnetising time. To ensure full magnetising, set this value to the same value
as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb
value given in the table below:
30 10000
21.03 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop function.
COAST Stop by cutting of the motor power supply. The motor coasts to a stop.
WARNING! If the mechanical brake control function is on, the
application program uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST
(see parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL).
1
RAMP Stop along a ramp. See parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL. 2
21.04 DC HOLD Activates/deactivates the DC hold function. DC Hold is not possible if
When both the reference and the speed drop below the value of parameter
21.05, the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC
into the motor. The current is set by parameter 21.06. When the reference
speed exceeds parameter 21.05, normal drive operation continues.
Note: DC Hold has no effect if the start signal is switched off.
Note: Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up. In
applications where long DC hold times are required, externally ventilated
motors should be used. If the DC hold period is long, the DC hold cannot
prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
21.05 DC HOLD SPEED Defines the DC Hold speed. See parameter 21.04.
0 3000 rpm Speed in rpm 0 3000
21.06 DC HOLD CURR Defines the DC hold current. See parameter 21.04.
0 100% Current in percent of the motor nominal current 0 100
Motor Rated Power Constant Magnetising Time
< 10 kW > 100 to 200 ms
10 to 200 kW > 200 to 1000 ms
200 to 1000 kW > 1000 to 2000 ms
DC HOLD SPEED
t
t
SPEEDmotor
Ref.
DC Hold
128
21.07 RUN ENABLE FUNC Selects the stop mode applied when the Run Enable signal is switched off. The
Run Enable signal is put into use by parameter 16.01.
Note: The setting overrides the normal stop mode setting (parameter 21.03)
when the Run Enable signal is switched off.
WARNING! The drive will restart after the Run Enable signal restores
(if the start signal is on).
RAMP STOP The application program stops the drive along the deceleration ramp defined in
group 22 ACCEL/DECEL.
1
COAST STOP The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply
(the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed.
WARNING! If the brake control function is on, the application program
uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST STOP (see parameter
group 42 BRAKE CONTROL).
2
OFF2 STOP The application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply
(the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed. The
drive will restart only when the Run Enable signal is on and the start signal is
switched on (the program receives the rising edge of the start signal).
3
OFF3 STOP The application program stops the drive along the ramp defined by parameter
22.07. The drive will restart only when the Run Enable is on and the start signal
is switched on (the program receives the rising edge of the start signal).
4
21.08 SCALAR FLY START Activates the flying start feature in the scalar control mode. See parameters
21.01 and 99.04.
NO Inactive. 0
YES Active. 1
21.09 START INTRL FUNC Defines how the Start Interlock input on RMIO board affects the drive
operation.
OFF2 STOP Drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Stop by coasting.
Drive stopped: 1 = Start allowed. 0 = No start allowed.
Restart after OFF2 STOP: Input is back to 1 and the drive receives rising edge
of the Start signal.
1
OFF3 STOP Drive running: 1 = Normal operation. 0 = Stop by ramp. The ramp time is
defined by parameter 22.07 EM STOP RAMP.
Drive stopped: 1 = Normal start. 0 = No start allowed.
Restart after OFF3 STOP: Start Interlock input = 1 and the drive receives rising
edge of the Start signal.
2
129
21.10 ZERO SPEED DELAY Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The function is useful in
applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay
the drive knows accurately the rotor position.
No Zero Speed Delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the
motor actual speed falls below an internal limit (called Zero Speed), the speed
controller is switched off. The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor
coasts to standstill.
With Zero Speed Delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the
actual motor speed falls below an internal limit (called Zero Speed), the zero
speed delay function activates. During the delay the functions keeps the speed
controller live: the inverter modulates, motor is magnetised and the drive is
ready for a quick restart.
0.0 60.0 s Delay time
22 ACCEL/DECEL
Acceleration and deceleration times.
22.01 ACC/DEC SEL Selects the active acceleration/deceleration time pair.
ACC/DEC 1 Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are used. See parameters 22.02
and 22.03.
1
ACC/DEC 2 Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are used. See parameters 22.04
and 22.05.
2
DI1 Acceleration/deceleration time pair selection through digital input DI1. 0 =
Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in use. 1 = Acceleration time 2
and deceleration time 2 are in use.
3
PAR 22.08&09 Acceleration and deceleration times given by parameters 22.08 and 22.09 15
Speed
Time
Zero Speed
Speed
Time
Zero Speed
Delay
No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay
Speed controller
switched off: Motor
coasts to stop.
Speed controller remains live.
Motor is decelerated to true 0
speed.
130
22.02 ACCEL TIME 1 Defines the acceleration time 1 i.e. the time required for the speed to change
from zero to the maximum speed.
- If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the acceleration rate.
- If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the reference signal.
- If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the
acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits.
0.00 1800.00 s Acceleration time 0 18000
22.03 DECEL TIME 1 Defines the deceleration time 1 i.e. the time required for the speed to change
from the maximum (see parameter 20.02) to zero.
- If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate, the
motor speed will follow the reference signal.
- If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate, the motor
speed will follow the deceleration rate.
- If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will automatically prolong the
deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits. If there is any doubt
about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that the DC overvoltage
control is on (parameter 20.05).
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application, the
drive should be equipped with an electric braking option e.g. with a brake
chopper and a brake resistor.
0.00 1800.00 s Deceleration time 0 18000
22.04 ACCEL TIME 2 See parameter 22.02.
0.00 1800.00 s See parameter 22.02. 0 18000
22.05 DECEL TIME 2 See parameter 22.03.
0.00 1800.00 s See parameter 22.03. 0 18000
22.06 ACC/DEC RAMP
SHPE
Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp.
0.00 1000.00 s 0.00 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for
slow ramps.
0.01 1000.00 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for conveyors
carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is
required when changing from one speed to another. The S curve consists of
symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.
0 100000
Linear ramp: Par. 20.06 = 0 s
S-curve ramp:
Par. 20.06 > 0 s
A rule of thumb
A suitable relation between the
ramp shape time and the
acceleration ramp time is 1/5.
Speed
time
Max
Par. 22.02 Par. 22.06
131
22.07 EM STOP RAMP
TIME
Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if
- the drive receives an emergency stop command or
- the Run Enable signal is switched off and the Run Enable function has value
OFF3 (see parameter 21.07).
The emergency stop command can be given through a fieldbus or an
Emergency Stop module (optional). Consult the local ABB representative for
more information on the optional module and the related settings of the
Standard Application Program.
0.00 2000.00 s Deceleration time 0 200000
22.08 ACC PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 22.08&09 of parameter 22.01.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
100 = 1 s
22.09 DEC PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 22.08&09 of parameter 22.01
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
100 = 1 s
23 SPEED CTRL
Speed controller variables. The parameters are not visible if parameter 99.04 =
SCALAR.
23.01 GAIN Defines a relative gain for the speed controller. Great gain may cause speed
oscillation.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when
the error remains constant.
0.0 250.0 Gain 0 25000
Gain = K
p
= 1
T
I
= Integration time = 0
T
D
= Derivation time = 0
Controller
Error Value
Controller Output
t
%
e = Error value
output = K
p
e
132
23.02 INTEGRATION TIME Defines an integration time for the speed controller. The integration time
defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is
constant. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value
is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the control unstable.
0.01 999.97 s Integration time 10
999970
23.03 DERIVATION TIME Defines the derivation time for the speed controller. Derivative action boosts
the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time,
the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the
derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise
as a PID controller.
The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances.
Note: Changing this parameter is recommended only if a pulse encoder is
used.
0.0 9999.8 ms Derivation time value. 1 = 1 ms
T
I
Controller Output
t
%
Gain = K
p
= 1
T
I
= Integration time > 0
T
D
= Derivation time = 0
K
p
e
e = Error value
K
p
e
T
I
K
p
e
Error Value
Controller Output
t
%
Gain = K
p
= 1
T
I
= Integration time > 0
T
D
= Derivation time > 0
T
s
= Sample time period = 2 ms
,e = Error value change between
two samples
e = Error value
K
p
T
D

,e
T
s K
p
e
133
23.04 ACC
COMPENSATION
Defines the derivation time for acceleration compensation. In order to
compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is added
to the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action is
described for parameter 23.03.
Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100%
of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven
machine. (The speed controller Autotune Run does this automatically, see
parameter 23.06.)
The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is
accelerated along a ramp.
0.00 999.98 s Derivation time 0 9999
23.05 SLIP GAIN Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control. 100% means full
slip compensation; 0% means no slip compensation. The default value is
100%. Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of
the full slip compensation.
Example: 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite of
the full slip compensation (SLIP GAIN = 100%), a manual tachometer
measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998 rpm. The static
speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip
gain should be increased. At the 106% gain value, no static speed error exists.
0.0 400.0% Slip gain value. 0 400
23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN Start automatic tuning of the speed controller. Instructions:
- Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the rated speed.
- Change the autotuning parameter 23.06 to YES.
Note: The motor load must be connected to the motor.
NO No autotuning. 0
YES Activates the speed controller autotuning. Automatically reverts to NO. 65535
24 TORQUE CTRL
Torque control variables.
Visible only if parameter 99.02 = T CNTRL and parameter 99.04 = DTC.
24.01 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the torque reference ramp up time.
0.00 120.00 s Time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque. 0 12000
24.02 TORQ RAMP DOWN Defines the torque reference ramp down time.
0.00 120.00 s Time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero. 0 12000
Speed reference
Actual speed
No Acceleration Compensation Acceleration Compensation
t t
% %
134
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS
Speed bands within which the drive is not allowed to operate.
25.01 CRIT SPEED
SELECT
Activates/deactivates the critical speeds function.
Example: A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1380 to
1560 rpm. To make the drive to jump over the vibration speed ranges:
- activate the critical speeds function,
- set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.
Note: If parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL, the critical speeds are not in use.
OFF Inactive 0
ON Active. 65535
25.02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW Defines the minimum limit for critical speed range 1.
0 18000 rpm Minimum limit. The value cannot be above the maximum (parameter 25.03).
Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, the unit is Hz.
0 18000
25.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH Defines the maximum limit for critical speed range 1.
0 18000 rpm Maximum limit. The value cannot be below the minimum (parameter 25.02).
Note: If parameter 99.04 = SCALAR, the unit is Hz.
0 18000
25.04 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW See parameter 25.02.
0 18000 rpm See parameter 25.02. 0 18000
25.05 CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH See parameter 25.03.
25.06 CRIT SPEED 3 LOW See parameter 25.02.
25.07 CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH See parameter 25.03.
26 MOTOR CONTROL
26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION Activates/deactivates the flux optimisation function.
Note: The function cannot be used if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
26.02 FLUX BRAKING Activates/deactivates the flux braking function.
Note: The function cannot be used if parameter 99.04 = SCALAR.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
Drive speed reference 540
690
1380
1560
Motor speed
1 Par. 25.02 = 540 rpm
2 Par. 25.03 = 690 rpm
3 Par. 25.04 = 1380 rpm
4 Par. 25.05 = 1590 rpm
1 2 3 4 (rpm)
(rpm)
135
26.03 IR COMPENSATION Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR compensation). The
function is useful in applications with high break-away torque, but no DTC
motor control cannot be applied. The figure below illustrates the IR
compensation.
Note: The function can be used only if parameter 99.04 is SCALAR.
0 30% Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of the motor nominal voltage 0 3000
26.05 HEX FIELD WEAKEN Selects whether motor flux is controlled along a circular or a hexagonal pattern
in the field weakening area of the frequency range (above 50/60 Hz).
NO The rotating flux vector follows a circular pattern. Optimal selection in most
applications: Minimal losses at constant load. Maximal instantaneous torque is
not available in the field weakening range of the speed.
0
YES Motor flux follows a circular pattern below the field weakening point (typically
50 or 60 Hz) and a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening range. Optimal
selection in the applications that require maximal instantaneous torque in the
field weakening range of the speed. The losses at constant operation are
higher than with the selection NO.
1
26.06 FLUX REF PTR Selects the source for the flux reference, or sets the flux reference value.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference. FbEq for the flux value is 100 = 1%. The range of the flux is 25
140%.
100 = 1%
27 BRAKE CHOPPER
Control of the brake chopper.
27.01 BRAKE CHOPPER
CTL
Activates the brake chopper control.
OFF Inactive 0
ON Active. Note: Ensure the brake chopper and resistor are installed and the
overvoltage control is switched off (parameter 20.05).
65535
27.02 BR OVERLOAD
FUNC
Activates the overload protection of the brake resistor. The user-adjustable
variables are parameters 27.03, 27.04 and 27.05.
NO Inactive 0
WARNING Active. If the drive detects an overload, it generates a warning. 1
FAULT Active. If the drive detects an overload, it trips on a fault. 2
27.03 BR RESISTANCE Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor. The value is used in the
overload protection. See parameter 27.02.
0.01 100.00 ohm Resistance value 0 100
U /U
N
(%)
f (Hz)
Field weakening point
Relative output voltage. No IR
compensation.
Relative output voltage. IR
compensation set to 15%.
15%
100%
136
27.04 BR THERM TCONST Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor. The value is used in the
overload protection. See parameter 27.02.
0.001 10000.000 s Time constant.
27.05 MAX CONT BR
POWER
Defines the maximum continuous braking power which will raise the resistor
temperature to the maximum allowed value. The value is used in the overload
protection. See parameter 27.02.
0.01 10000 kW Power
27.06 BC CTRL MODE Selects the control mode of the braking chopper.
AS GENERATOR Chopper operation is allowed when the DC voltage exceeds the braking limit,
the inverter bridge modulates and the motor generates power to the drive.
The selection prevents the operation in case the intermediate circuit DC
voltage rises due to abnormally high supply voltage level. Long term supply
voltage rise would damage the chopper.
1
COMMON DC Chopper operation is allowed always when the DC voltage exceeds the
braking limit. The selection is to be used in applications where several
inverters are connected the same intermediate circuit (DC bus).
WARNING! Excessive supply voltage will rise the intermediate circuit
voltage above the operation limit of the chopper. If the voltage remains
abnormally high for a long period, the braking chopper will be
overloaded and damaged.
2
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS
Programmable protection functions
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts when an analogue input signal falls below the set
minimum limit.
Note: The analogue input minimum setting must be set to 0.5 V (1 mA) or
above (see parameter group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS).
FAULT The drive trips on a fault and the motor coasts to stop. 1
NO Inactive 2
CONST SP 15 The drive generates a warning AI < MIN FUNC (8110) and sets the speed to
the value defined by parameter 12.16.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the
analogue input signal is lost.
3
LAST SPEED The drive generates a warning AI < MIN FUNC (8110) and freezes the speed
to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average
speed over the previous 10 seconds.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the
analogue input signal is lost.
4
30.02 PANEL LOSS Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel communication break.
FAULT Drive trips on a fault and the motor stops as defined by parameter 21.03. 1
CONST SP 15 The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the speed defined by
parameter 12.16.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a
panel communication break.
2
137
LAST SPEED The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to the level the drive was
operating at. The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous
10 seconds.
panel communication break.
3
30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT Selects an interface for an external fault signal.
NOT SEL Inactive 1
DI1 External fault indication is given through digital input DI1. 0: Fault trip. Motor
coasts to stop. 1: No external fault.
2
30.04 MOTOR THERM
PROT
Selects how the drive reacts when the motor overtemperature is detected by
the function defined by Parameter 30.05.
Note: The parameter has no effect if the motor temperature measurement has
been activated by parameter group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
FAULT The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning
level (95% of the allowed maximum value). The drive trips on a fault when the
temperature exceeds the fault level (100% of the allowed maximum value).
1
WARNING The drive generates a warning when the temperature exceeds the warning
level (95% of the allowed maximum value).
2
NO Inactive 3
30.05 MOT THERM P
MODE
Selects the thermal protection mode of the motor. When overtemperature is
detected, the drive reacts as defined by parameter 30.04.
DTC The protection is based on the calculated motor thermal model. The following
assumptions are used in the calculation:
- The motor is at ambient temperature (30 C) when the power is switched on.
- The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the load
curve and decreases if it operates below the curve.
- The motor thermal time constant is an approximate value for a standard self-
ventilated squirrel-cage motor.
It is possible to finetune the model by parameter 30.07.
Note: The model cannot be used with high power motors (parameter 99.06 is
higher than 800 A).
WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool
properly due to dust and dirt.
1
138
USER MODE The protection is based on the user-defined motor thermal model and the
following basic assumptions:
- The motor is at ambient temperature (30 C) when power is switched on.
- The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region above the motor
load curve and decreases if it operates below the curve.
The user-defined thermal model uses the motor thermal time constant
(parameter 30.06) and the motor load curve (parameters 30.07, 30.08 and
30.09). User tuning is typically needed only if the ambient temperature differs
from the normal operating temperature specified for the motor.
WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if it does not cool
properly due to dust and dirt.
2
139
THERMISTOR Motor thermal protection is activated through digital input DI6. A motor
thermistor, or a break contact of a thermistor relay, must be connected to digital
input DI6. The drive reads the DI6 states as follows:
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor
thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation
between motor live parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation
entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm (400 / 500 VAC equipment).
If the thermistor assembly does not fulfil the requirement, the other I/O
terminals of the drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay
must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input.
WARNING! Digital input DI6 may be selected for another use. Change
these settings before selecting THERMISTOR. In other words, ensure
that digital input DI6 is not selected by any other parameter.
The figure below shows the alternative thermistor connections. At the motor
end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not
possible, the shield is to be left unconnected.
3
DI6 Status (Thermistor resistance) Temperature
1 (0 1.5 kohm) Normal
0 (4 kohm or higher) Overtemperature
Motor
T
10 nF
Motor
T
Thermistor
relay
RMIO board, X22
6 DI6
7 +24 VDC
Alternative 1
Alternative 2
RMIO board, X22
6 DI6
7 +24 VDC
140
30.06 MOTOR THERM
TIME
Defines the thermal time constant for the user-defined thermal model (see the
selection USER MODE of parameter 30.05).
256.0 9999.8 s Time constant 256 9999
30.07 MOTOR LOAD
CURVE
Defines the load curve together by parameters 30.08 and 30.09. The load
curve is used in the user-defined thermal model (see the selection USER
MODE of parameter 30.05).
50.0 150.0% Allowed continuous motor load in percent of the nominal motor current. 50 150
30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.09.
25.0 150.0% Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of the nominal motor
current
25 150
30.09 BREAK POINT Defines the load curve together with parameters 30.07 and 30.08.
1.0 300.0 Hz Drive output frequency at 100% load 100
30000
30.10 STALL FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The protection wakes up
if:
- the motor torque is at the internal stall torque limit (not user-adjustable)
- the output frequency is below the level set by parameter 30.11 and
- the conditions above have been valid longer than the time set by parameter
30.12.
FAULT The drive trips on a fault. 1
WARNING The drive generates a warning. The indication disappears in half of the time set
by parameter 30.12.
2
Motor
100%
Temperature
63%
Motor thermal time constant
t
t
Load
100%
50
100
150
Drive output frequency
30.07
30.09
30.08
I/I
N
(%)
I = Motor current
I
N
= Nominal motor current
141
NO Protection is inactive. 3
30.11 STALL FREQ HI Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See parameter 30.10.
0.5 50.0 Hz Stall frequency 50 5000
30.12 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function. See parameter 30.10.
10.00 400.00 s Stall time 10 400
30.13 UNDERLOAD FUNC Selects how the drive reacts to underload. The protection wakes up if:
- the motor torque falls below the curve selected by parameter 30.15,
- output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal motor frequency and
- the above conditions have been valid longer than the time set by parameter
30.14.
WARNING The drive generates a warning. 2
30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME Time limit for the underload function. See parameter 30.13.
0 600 s Underload time 0 600
30.15 UNDERLOAD
CURVE
Selects the load curve for the underload function. See parameter 30.13.
1 5 Number of the load curve 1 5
30.16 MOTOR PHASE
LOSS
Activates the motor phase loss supervision function.
NO Inactive 0
FAULT Active. The drive trips on a fault. 65535
30.17 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth fault is detected in the motor or the
motor cable.
30.18 COMM FLT FUNC Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication break, i.e. when the
drive fails to receive the Main Reference Data Set or the Auxiliary Reference
Data Set. The time delays are given by parameters 30.19 and 30.21.
FAULT Protection is active. The drive trips on a fault and stops the motor as defined by
parameter 21.03.
1
100
80
60
40
20
0
2.4 *
N

3
2
1
5
4
T
M
/T
N
70%
50%
30%
N

(%)
T
M
= Motor torque
T
N
= Nominal motor torque
N
= Nominal motor frequency
142
CONST SP 15 Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and sets the speed to the
value defined by parameter 12.16.
communication break.
3
LAST SPEED Protection is active. The drive generates a warning and freezes the speed to
the level the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the average
speed over the previous 10 seconds.
communication break.
4
30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT Defines the time delay for the Main Reference Dataset supervision. See
parameter 30.18.
0.1 60.0 s Time delay 10 6000
30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO Selects the operation of the fieldbus controlled relay output and analogue
output in a communication break. See groups 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and 15
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS and the chapter Fieldbus control. The delay for the
supervision function is given by parameter 30.21.
ZERO Relay output is de-energised. Analogue output is set to zero. 1
LAST VALUE The relay output keeps the last state before the communication loss. The
analogue output gives the last value before the communication loss.
WARNING! After the communication recovers, the update of the relay
and the analogue outputs starts immediately without fault message
resetting.
65535
30.21 AUX DS T-OUT Defines the delay time for the Auxiliary Reference Dataset supervision. See
parameter 30.18. The drive automatically activates the supervision 60 seconds
after power switch-on if the value is other than zero.
Note: The delay also applies for the function defined by parameter 30.20.
0.0 60.0 s Time delay. 0.0 s = The function is inactive. 0 6000
30.22 IO CONFIG FUNC Selects how the drive reacts in case an optional input or output channel has
been selected as a signal interface, but the communication to the appropriate
analogue or digital I/O extension module has not been set up accordingly in
parameter group 98 OPTION MODULES.
Example: The supervision function wakes up if parameter 16.01 is set to DI7,
but 98.03 is set to NO.
NO Inactive. 1
WARNING Active. The drive generates a warning. 2
31 AUTOMATIC RESET
Automatic fault reset.
Automatic resets are possible only for certain fault types and when the
automatic reset function is activated for that fault type.
The automatic reset function is not operational if the drive is in local control (L
visible on the first row of the panel display).
31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time
defined by parameter 31.02.
0 5 Number of the automatic resets 0
31.02 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See parameter 31.01.
1.0 180.0 s Allowed resetting time 100
18000
143
31.03 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an
automatic reset. See parameter 31.01.
0.0 3.0 s Resetting delay 0 300
31.04 OVERCURRENT Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the overcurrent fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
31.05 OVERVOLTAGE Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link overvoltage
fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link undervoltage
fault.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the fault AI SIGNAL<MIN
(analogue input signal under the allowed minimum level).
NO Inactive 0
YES Active.
WARNING! The drive may restart even after a long stop if the
analogue input signal is restored. Ensure that the use of this feature
will not cause danger.
65535
32 SUPERVISION
Supervision limits. A relay output can be used to indicate when the value is
above/below the limit.
32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the speed supervision function and selects the type of
the supervision limit.
NO Supervision is not used. 1
LOW LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit. 2
HIGH LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit. 3
ABS LOW LIMIT Supervision wakes up if the value is below the set limit. The limit is supervised
in both rotating directions. The figure below illustrates the principle.
4
32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT Defines the speed supervision limit. See parameter 32.01.
- 18000 18000 rpm Value of the limit - 18000
18000
32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION See parameter 32.01.
LOW LIMIT See parameter 32.01. 2
HIGH LIMIT See parameter 32.01. 3
ABS LOW LIMIT See parameter 32.01. 4
32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT See parameter 32.01.
ABS LOW LIMIT
-ABS LOW LIMIT
speed/rpm
0
144
- 18000 18000 rpm See parameter 32.01. - 18000
18000
32.05 CURRENT
FUNCTION
Activates/deactivates the motor current supervision function and selects the
type of the supervision limit.
32.06 CURRENT LIMIT Defines the limit for the motor current supervision (see parameter 32.05).
0 1000 A Value of the limit 0 1000
32.07 TORQUE 1
FUNCTION
Activates/deactivates the motor torque supervision function and selects the
32.08 TORQUE 1 LIMIT Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision (see parameter 32.07).
-600 600% Value of the limit in percent of the motor nominal torque -6000
6000
32.09 TORQUE 2
FUNCTION
Activates/deactivates the motor torque supervision function and selects the
32.10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT Defines the limit for the motor torque supervision (see parameter 32.09).
-600 600% Value of the limit in percent of motor nominal torque -6000
6000
32.11 REF1 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the external reference REF1 supervision function and
selects the type of the supervision limit.
32.12 REF1 LIMIT Defines the limit for REF1 supervision (see parameter 32.11).
0 18000 rpm Value of the limit 0 18000
32.13 REF2 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates external reference REF2 supervision function and
selects the type of the supervision limit.
32.14 REF2 LIMIT Defines the limit for REF2 supervision (see parameter 32.13).
0 600% Value of the limit 0 6000
32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the supervision function for variable ACT1 of the process
PID controller and selects the type of the supervision limit.
145
32.16 ACT1 LIMIT Defines the limit for ACT1 supervision (see parameter 32.15).
32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION Activates/deactivates the supervision function for variable ACT2 of the process
PID controller and selects the type of the supervision limit.
32.18 ACT2 LIMIT Defines the limit for ACT2 supervision (see parameter 32.17).
33 INFORMATION
Program versions, test date
33.01 SOFTWARE
VERSION
Displays the type and the version of the firmware package in the drive.
Decoding key:
33.02 APPL SW VERSION Displays the type and the version of the application program.
Decoding key:
33.03 TEST DATE Displays the test date.
Date value in format DDMMYY (day, month, year)
ASxxxxyx
Product Series
A = ACS800
Product
S = ACS800 Standard
Firmware Version
7xyx = Version 7.xyx
ASAxxxyx
Product Series
A = ACS800
Product
S = ACS800 Standard
Firmware Type
A = Application Program
Firmware Version
7xyx = Version 7.xyx
146
34 PROCESS VARIABLE
- user variable and unit
- filtering for the actual signals speed and torque
- reset of the run time counter
34.01 SCALE Scales the selected drive variable into a desired user-defined variable, which is
stored as an actual signal 01.01. The block diagram below illustrates the use of
the parameters that define actual signal 01.01.
0.00 100000.00 Scaling factor 0 100000
34.02 P VAR UNIT Selects the unit for the process variable. See parameter 34.01.
NO No unit is selected. 1
rpm revolutions per minute 2
% percent 3
m/s metres per second 4
A ampere 5
V volt 6
Hz hertz 7
s second 8
h hour 9
kh kilohour 10
C celsius 11
lft labels per foot 12
mA milliampere 13
mV millivolt 14
kW kilowatt 15
W watt 16
kWh kilowatt hour 17
F fahrenheit 18
hp horsepower 19
MWh megawatt hour 20
m3h cubic metres per hour 21
01.01
34.01
NO
FPM
Unit for actual
signal 01.01
34.03
Select
34.02
Select
PARAMETER
00.00
99.99
TABLE

Mul.
147
l/s litres per second 22
bar bar 23
kPa kilopascal 24
GPM gallons per minute 25
PSI pounds per square inch 26
CFM cubic feet per minute 27
ft foot 28
MGD millions of gallons per day 29
iHg inches of mercury 30
FPM feet per minute 31
34.03 SELECT P VAR Selects the drive variable scaled into a desired process variable. See
parameter 34.01.
0 9999 Parameter index 0 9999
34.04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM Defines a filter time constant for the actual signal speed (01.02), the speed
value used in the speed supervision (parameters 32.01 and 32.03) and the
speed value read through an analogue output.
0 20000 ms Filter time constant 0 20000
34.05 TORQ ACT FILT TIM Defines a filter time for the actual signal torque (actual signal 01.05). Affects
also on the torque supervision (parameters 32.07 and 32.09) and the torque
read through an analogue output.
0 20000 ms Filter time constant 0 20000
34.06 RESET RUN TIME Resets the motor running time counter (actual signal 01.43).
NO No reset. 0
YES Reset. The counter restarts from zero. 65535
35 MOT TEMP MEAS
Motor temperature measurement. For the function description see the chapter
Program features.
35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL Activates the motor 1 temperature measurement function and selects the
sensor type.
NOT IN USE The function is inactive. 1
63
%
100
T
t
Filtered Signal
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 - e
-t/T
)
O = filter output
t = time
63
%
100
T
t
Filtered Signal
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 - e
-t/T
)
O = filter output
t = time
148
1xPT100 The function is active. The temperature is measured with one Pt 100 sensor.
Analogue output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor. The sensor
resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over
the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
analogue input AI1 and converts it to degrees centigrade.
2
2XPT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using two Pt 100 sensors.
See selection 1xPT100.
3
3XPT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using three Pt 100 sensors.
See selection 1xPT100.
4
1..3 PTC The function is active. The temperature is supervised using one to three PTC
sensors. Analogue output AO1 feeds constant current through the sensor(s).
The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises
over the PTC reference temperature (T
ref
), as does the voltage over the
resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
analogue input AI1 and converts it into ohms. The figure below shows typical
PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating
temperature.
5
35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L Defines the alarm limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The alarm
indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 5000 ohm/C
(PTC/Pt100)
Limit in C or ohms. C: parameter 35.01 is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100.
Ohm: parameter 35.01 is 1..3 PTC.
-10 5000
35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L Defines the fault trip limit for motor 1 temperature measurement. The fault
indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 5000 ohm/C
(PTC/Pt100)
Limit in C or ohms. C: parameter 35.01 is 1xPT100, 2XPT100, 3XPT100.
Ohm: parameter 35.01 is 1..3 PTC.
-10 5000
35.04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL Activates the motor 2 temperature measurement function and selects the
sensor type. Two motors can be protected only by using an optional analogue
extension module. Parameter 98.12 needs to be activated.
Note: If 98.12 is activated, the analogue I/O extension is also used for motor 1
temperature measurement (the standard I/O terminals are not in use).
NOT IN USE See 35.01 1
1xPT100 See 35.01 2
2XPT100 See 35.01 3
3XPT100 See 35.01 4
1..3 PTC See 35.01 5
100
550
1330
4000
Ohm
T
Temperature Resistance
Normal 0 1.5 kohm
Excessive > 4 kohm
149
35.05 MOT 2 TEMP ALM L Defines the alarm limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function. The
alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 5000 ohm/C
(PTC/Pt100)
See 35.02 -10 5000
35.06 MOT 2 TEMP FLT L Defines the fault trip limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function.
The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded.
-10 5000 ohm/C
(PTC/Pt100)
See 35.03 -10 5000
35.07 MOT MOD
COMPENSAT
Selects whether measured motor 1 temperature is used in the motor model
compensation.
NO The function is inactive. 1
YES The temperature is used in the motor model compensation.
Note: Selection is possible only when Pt 100 sensor(s) are used.
0
40 PID CONTROL
- process PID control (99.02 = PID CTRL)
- speed or torque reference trimming (99.02 is not PID CTRL)
- sleep function for the process PID control (99.02 = PID CTRL)
For more information, see the chapter Program features.
40.01 PID GAIN Defines the gain of the process PID controller.
0.1 100.0 Gain value. The table below lists a few examples of the gain settings and the
resulting speed changes when
- a 10% or 50% error value is connected to the controller
(error = process reference - process actual value).
- motor maximum speed is 1500 rpm (Parameter 20.02)
10 10000
40.02 PID INTEG TIME Defines the integration time for the process PID controller.
0.02 320.00 s Integration time 2 32000
40.03 PID DERIV TIME Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. The derivative
component at the controller output is calculated on basis of two consecutive
error values (E
K-1
and E
K
) according to the following formula:
PID DERIV TIME (E
K
- E
K-1
)/T
S
, in which
T
S
= 12 ms sample time.
E = Error = Process reference - process actual value

PID Gain Speed Change:
10% Error
Speed Change:
50% Error
0.5 75 rpm 375 rpm
1.0 150 rpm 750 rpm
3.0 450 rpm 1500 rpm (limited)
Error/Controller output
Ti
time
O
I
G I
G I
I = controller input (error)
O = controller output
G = gain
t = time
Ti = integration time
150
0.00 10.00 s Derivation time. 0 1000
40.04 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to smooth the derivative
component of the process PID controller.
0.04 10.00 s Filter time constant. 4 1000
40.05 ERROR VALUE INV Inverts the error at the process PID controller input (error = process reference -
process actual value).
NO No inversion 0
YES Inversion 65535
40.06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL Selects the process actual value for the process PID controller: The sources
for the variable ACT1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 40.07 and
40.08.
ACT1 ACT1 1
ACT1 - ACT2 Subtraction of ACT1 and ACT 2. 2
ACT1 + ACT2 Addition of ACT1 and ACT2 3
ACT1 * ACT2 Multiplication of ACT1 and ACT2 4
ACT1/ACT2 Division of ACT1 and ACT2 5
MIN(A1,A2) Selects the smaller of ACT1 and ACT2 6
MAX(A1,A2) Selects the higher of ACT1 and ACT2 7
sqrt(A1 - A2) Square root of the subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 8
sqA1 + sqA2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of ACT2 9
40.07 ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT1. See parameter 40.06.
40.08 ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL Selects the source for the variable ACT2. See parameter 40.06.
63
%
100
T
t
Filtered Signal
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 - e
-t/T
)
O = filter output
t = time
151
40.09 ACT1 MINIMUM Defines the minimum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is
selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.07. The minimum and
maximum (40.10) settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal
received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used
by the process PID controller.
-1000 1000% Minimum value in percent of the set analogue input range. The equation below
instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is used as a
variable ACT1.
-10000
10000
40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an analogue input is
selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 40.07. The minimum (40.09)
and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current signal received
from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the
process PID controller.
-1000 1000% Maximum value in percent of the set analogue input signal range. The
equation below instructs how to calculate the value when analogue input AI1 is
used as a variable ACT1.
-10000
10000
40.11 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 40.09.
-1000 1000% See parameter 40.09. -10000
10000
40.12 ACT2 MAXIMUM See parameter 40.10.
-1000 1000% See parameter 40.10. -10000
10000
40.13 PID INTEGRATION Activates the integration of the process PID controller.
OFF Inactive 1
ON Active 2
ACT1 MINIMUM =

AI1min The voltage value received from the measuring device when
the measured process actual value is at the desired minimum
level.
13.01 AI1 minimum (parameter setting)
13.02 AI1 maximum (parameter setting)
AI1min - 13.01
13.02 - 13.01
100%
ACT1 MAXIMUM =

AI1max The voltage value received from the measuring device when
the measured process actual value is at the desired maximum
level.
13.01 AI1 minimum (parameter setting)
13.02 AI1 maximum (parameter setting)
AI1max - 13.01
13.02 - 13.01
100%
152
40.14 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct and proportional
trimming. Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive
reference.
Example: A speed-controlled conveyor line where the line tension also needs
to be considered: The speed reference is slightly adjusted (trimmed)
depending on the value of the measured line tension.
Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
OFF The trim function is deactivated. 1
PROPORTIONAL The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to the external %-
reference (REF2). See parameter 11.06.
2
DIRECT The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum
limit used in the reference control loop (maximum speed, frequency or torque).
3
40.15 TRIM REF SEL Selects the signal source for the trim reference. Not visible when parameter
99.02 = PID CTRL.
PAR 40.16 Value of parameter 40.16 is used as the trim reference. 6
40.16 TRIM REFERENCE Defines the trim reference value when parameter 40.15 has the value PAR
40.16 selected. Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
-100.0 100.0% Trim reference - 10000
10000
40.17 TRIM RANGE
ADJUST
Defines the multiplier for the PID controller output used as the trimming factor.
Not visible when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
-100.0 100.0% Multiplying factor - 10000
10000
40.18 TRIM SELECTION Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the speed or torque
reference.
Visible only when parameter 99.02 = T CTRL.
SPEED TRIM Speed reference trimming 1
T
r
i
m

r
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
sclAI5
-sclAI5
Example: AI5 as a trim reference
minAI5 = parameter 13.16
maxAI5 = parameter 13.17
sclAI5 = parameter 13.18
AI5 be used only with an optional
I/O extension module.
153
TORQUE TRIM Torque reference trimming 2
40.19 ACTUAL FILT TIME Defines the time constant for the filter through which the actual signals are
connected to the process PID controller.
0.04 10.00 s Filter time constant. 4 1000
40.20 SLEEP SELECTION Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the activation input.
Visible only when parameter 99.02 = PID CTRL.
OFF Inactive 1
INTERNAL Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by parameters 40.21 and
40.23.
2
DI1 The function is activated/deactivated through digital input DI1.
Activation: Digital input DI1 = 1. Deactivation: DI1 = 0.
The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 40.21 and 40.23 are not effective.
The sleep start and stop delays are effective (parameter 40.22 and 40.24).
3
40.21 SLEEP LEVEL Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the motor speed is below a set
level (40.21) longer than the sleep delay (40.22), the drive shifts to the sleeping
mode: the motor is stopped and the control panel shows the warning message
SLEEP MODE.
0.0 7200.0 rpm Sleep start level 0 7200
40.22 SLEEP DELAY Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See parameter 40.21. When the
motor speed falls below the sleep level, the counter starts. When the motor
speed exceeds the sleep level, the counter resets.
0.0 3600.0 s Sleep start delay 0 36000
63
%
100
T
t
Filtered Signal
Unfiltered Signal
O = I (1 - e
-t/T
)
O = filter output
t = time
154
40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL Defines the wake up limit for the sleep function. The drive wakes up if the
process actual value is below a set level (40.23) longer than the wake-up delay
(40.24).
0.0 100.0% The wake-up level in percent of the used process reference value. 0 10000
40.24 WAKE UP DELAY Defines the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See parameter 40.23. When
the process actual value falls below the wake-up level, the wake-up counter
starts. When the process actual value exceeds the wake-up level, the counter
resets.
0.0 3600.0 s Wake-up delay 0 36000
40.25 ACTUAL1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 40.25 of parameter 40.07.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
100 = 1%
40.26 PID MINIMUM Defines the minimum limit for the PID controller output. Using the minimum and
maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed range.
Example: The process PID control is restricted to the forward rotation direction
of the motor by setting the PID minimum limit to 0% and the maximum to
100%.
-100 100% Limit in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor.
40.27 PID MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the PID controller output. Using the minimum
and maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the operation to a certain speed
range. See parameter 40.26.
-100 100% Limit in percent of the Absolute Maximum Speed of the motor.
42 BRAKE CONTROL
Control of a mechanical brake. The function operates on a 100 ms time level.
For the function description, see the chapter Program features.
42.01 BRAKE CTRL Activates the brake control function.
OFF Inactive 1
ON Active 2
42.02 BRAKE
ACKNOWLEDGE
Activates the external brake on/off supervision and selects the source for the
signal. The use of the external on/off supervision signal is optional.
OFF Inactive 1
DI5 Active. Digital input DI5 is the signal source. DI5 = 1: The brake is open.
DI5 = 0: the brake is closed.
2
DI6 See DI5. 3
DI11 See DI5. 4
DI12 See DI5. 5
42.03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY Defines the brake open delay. The delay counter starts when the drive has
magnetised the motor and risen the motor torque to the level required at the
brake release (parameters 42.07 and 42.08). Simultaneously with the counter
start, the brake function energises the relay output controlling the brake and
the brake starts opening.
0.0 5.0 s Delay time. Set the delay the same as the mechanical opening delay of the
brake specified the brake manufacturer.
0 500
155
42.04 BRAKE CLOSE
DELAY
Defines the brake close delay. The delay counter starts when the motor actual
speed has fallen below the set level (parameter 42.05) after the drive has
received the stop command. Simultaneously with the counter start, the brake
control function de-energises the relay output controlling the brake and the
brake starts closing. During the delay, the brake function keeps the motor live
preventing the motor speed from falling below zero.
0.0 60.0 s Delay time. Set the delay time to the same value as the mechanical make-up
time of the brake (= operating delay when closing) specified by the brake
manufacturer.
0 6000
42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS
SPD
Defines the brake close speed. See parameter 42.04.
0 1000 rpm Speed (an absolute value) 0 100000
42.06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC Defines how the drive reacts in case the status of the optional external brake
acknowledgement signal does not meet the status presumed by the brake
control function.
FAULT The drive trips on a fault: fault indication and drive stops the motor. 1
42.07 START TORQ REF
SEL
Selects the source for the motor starting torque reference applied at the brake
release. The value is read in percent of the motor nominal torque.
NO No source selected. This is the default value. 1
PAR 42.08 Defined by parameter 42.08. 7
MEMORY The motor torque stored at the previous brake close command. 8
42.08 START TORQ REF Defines the motor starting torque at brake release if parameter 42.07 has value
PAR 40.28.
-300 300% Torque value in percent of the motor nominal torque -30000
30000
42.09 EXTEND RUN T Defines an extended run time for the brake control function at stop. During the
delay, the motor is kept magnetised and ready for an immediate restart.
156
0.0 60.0 s 0.0 s = Normal stop routine of the brake control function: The motor
magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay has passed.
0.1 60.0 s = Extended stop routine of the brake control function: The motor
magnetisation is switched off after the brake close delay and the extended run
time have passed. During the extended run time, a zero torque reference is
applied, and the motor is ready for a immediate restart.
42.10 LOW REF BRK HOLD Activates a brake hold function and defines the hold delay for it. The function
stabilises the operation of the brake control application when the motor
operates near zero speed and there is no measured speed feedback available
(pulse encoder).
0.0 60.0 s 0.0 s = inactive.
0.1 s 60.0 s = active. When the absolute value of the motor speed reference
falls below the brake close speed:
- The brake hold delay counter starts.
- The brake is closed according to normal stop routine of the brake control
function.
During the delay, the function keeps the brake closed despite of the speed
reference value and the value of start command. When the set delay has
passed, the normal operation resumes.
50 ENCODER MODULE
Encoder connection. Visible only when a pulse encoder module (optional) is
installed and activated by parameter 98.01.
The settings will remain the same even though the application macro is
changed.
50.01 PULSE NR States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution.
0 29999 ppr Pulse number in pulses per round (ppr) 0 29999
50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE Defines how the encoder pulses are calculated.
A
-
-
B DIR Channel A: positive edges calculated for speed. Channel B: direction. 0
A
-
-
-
Channel A: positive and negative edges calculated for speed. Channel B: not
used.
1
A
-
-
-
B DIR Channel A: positive and negative edges are calculated for speed. Channel B:
direction.
2
A
-
-
-
B
-
-
-
All edges of the signals are calculated. 3
Motor magnetised
Start/Stop
t
2 3
1 = brake close speed
2 = brake close delay

Actual speed
3 = extended run time
1
157
50.03 ENCODER FAULT Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in communication
between the pulse encoder and the pulse encoder interface module, or
between the module and the drive. Encoder supervision function activates if
either of the following conditions is valid:
-There is a 20% difference between the estimated speed and the measured
speed received from the encoder.
- No pulses are received from the encoder within the defined time (see
parameter 50.04) and the motor torque is at the allowed maximum value.
WARNING The drive generates a warning indication. 1
FAULT The drive trips on a fault, gives a fault indication and stops the motor. 65535
50.04 ENCODER DELAY Defines the time delay for the encoder supervision function (See parameter
50.03).
0 50000 ms Time delay 0 50000
50.05 ENCODER DDCS
CHANNEL
Defines the fibre optic channel of the control board from which the drive
program reads the signals coming from the pulse encoder interface module.
The setting is valid only if the module is connected to the drive via the DDCS
link (i.e. not to the option slot of the drive).
CHANNEL 1 Signals via channel 1 (CH1). The pulse encoder interface module must be
connected to CH1 instead of CH2 in applications where CH2 is reserved by a
Master station (e.g. a Master/Follower application). See also parameter 70.03.
1
CHANNEL 2 Signals via channel 2 (CH2). Can be used in most cases. 2
50.06 SPEED FB SEL Defines the speed feedback value used in control.
INTERNAL Calculated speed estimate 0
ENCODER Actual speed measured with an encoder 65535
51 COMM MOD DATA
The parameters are visible and need to be adjusted, only when a fieldbus
adapter module (optional) is installed and activated by parameter 98.02. For
details on the parameters, refer to the manual of the fieldbus module and the
chapter Fieldbus control.
These parameter settings will remain the same even though the macro is
changed.
52 STANDARD
MODBUS
The settings for the Standard Modbus Link. See the chapter Fieldbus control.
52.01 STATION NUMBER Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same address are not
allowed on-line.
1 247 Address
52.02 BAUDRATE Defines the transfer rate of the link.
600 600 bit/s 1
1200 1200 bit/s 2
2400 2400 bit/s 3
4800 4800 bit/s 4
9600 9600 bit/s 5
19200 19200 bit/s 6
52.03 PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must be used in all
on-line stations.
NONE1STOPBIT No parity bit, one stop bit 1
NONE2STOPBIT No parity bit, two stop bits 2
158
ODD Odd parity indication bit, one stopbit 3
EVEN Even parity indication bit, one stopbit 4
60 MASTER/
FOLLOWER
Master/Follower application. For more information, see the chapter Program
features and a separate Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFE 64590430
[English]).
60.01 MASTER LINK MODE Defines the role of the drive on the Master/Follower link.
NOT IN USE The Master/Follower link is not active. 1
MASTER Master drive 2
FOLLOWER Follower drive 3
STANDBY Follower drive which reads the control signals through a fieldbus interface, not
from the Master/Follower link as usual.
4
60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR Selects the reference used in motor torque control. Typically, the value needs
to be changed only in the Follower station(s).
The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 = T CTRL.
External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable torque selector.
SPEED The follower speed controller output is used as a reference for motor torque
control. The drive is speed-controlled. SPEED can be used both in the
Follower and in the Master if
- the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are connected flexibly. (A slight
speed difference between the Master and the Follower is possible/allowed.)
- drooping is used (see parameter 60.06).
1
TORQUE The drive is torque-controlled. The selection is used in the Follower(s) when
the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are coupled solidly to each other
by gearing, a chain or other means of mechanical power transmission and no
speed difference between the drives is allowed or possible.
Note: If TORQUE is selected, the drive does not restrict the speed variation as
long as the speed is within the limits defined by parameters 20.01 and 20.02.
More definite speed supervision is often needed. In those cases, the selection
ADD should be used instead of TORQUE.
2
MINIMUM The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed
controller output, and the smaller of them is used as the reference for the
motor torque control. MINIMUM is selected in special cases only.
3
MAXIMUM The torque selector compares the direct torque reference and the speed
controller output and the greater of them is used as the reference for the motor
torque control. MAXIMUM is selected in special cases only.
4
ADD The torque selector adds the speed controller output to the direct torque
reference. The drive is torque-controlled in the normal operating range. The
selection ADD, together with the window control, forms a speed supervision
function for a torque-controlled Follower drive. See parameter 60.03.
5
ZERO This selection forces the output of the torque selector to zero. 6
60.03 WINDOW SEL ON Activates the Window control function. The Window control, together with
selection ADD at parameter 60.02, forms a speed supervision function for a
torque-controlled drive. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is
T CTRL. External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable window
control.
NO Inactive 0
159
YES Window control is active. Selection YES is used only when parameter 60.02
has value ADD. Window control supervises the speed error value (Speed
Reference - Actual Speed). In the normal operating range, window control
keeps the speed controller input at zero. The speed controller is evoked only if:
- the speed error exceeds the value of parameter 60.04 or
- the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds the value of
parameter 60.05.
When the speed error moves outside the window, the exceeding part of the
error value is connected to the speed controller. The speed controller produces
a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speed controller
(parameter 23.01) which the torque selector adds to the torque reference. The
result is used as the internal torque reference for the drive.
Example: In a load loss condition, the internal torque reference of the drive is
decreased to prevent an excessive rise of the motor speed. If window control
were inactivated, the motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the drive
were reached.
65535
60.04 WINDOW WIDTH
POS
Defines the supervision window width above the speed reference. See
parameter 60.03. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is T
CTRL.
0 1500 rpm Positive window width 0 20000
60.05 WINDOW WIDTH
NEG
Defines the supervision window width below the speed reference. See
parameter 60.03. The parameter is visible only when parameter 99.02 is T
CTRL.
0 1500 rpm Negative window width 0 20000
160
60.06 DROOP RATE Defines the droop rate. The parameter value needs to be changed only if both
the Master and the Follower are speed-controlled:
- External control location 1 (EXT1) is selected (see parameter 11.02 or
- External control location 2 (EXT2) is selected (see parameter 11.02) and
parameter 60.02 is set to SPEED.
The droop rate needs to be set both for the Master and the Follower. The
correct droop rate for a process must be found out case by case in practice.
The drooping prevents a conflict between the Master and the Follower by
allowing a slight speed difference between them. The drooping slightly
decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases. The actual speed
decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and
the drive load ( = torque reference / speed controller output). At 100% speed
controller output, drooping is at its nominal level, i.e. equal to the value of the
DROOP RATE. The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the
decreasing load.
0 100% Droop rate in percent of the motor nominal speed 0 1000
60.07 MASTER SIGNAL 2 Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 1
(speed reference).
0000 9999 Parameter index 0000
9999
60.08 MASTER SIGNAL 3 Selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 2
(torque reference).
0000 9999 Parameter index 0000
9999
70 DDCS CONTROL
Settings for the fibre optic channels 0, 1 and 3.
70.01 CHANNEL 0 ADDR Defines the node address for channel 0. No two nodes on-line may have the
same address. The setting needs to be changed when a master station is
connected to channel 0 and it does not automatically change the address of
the slave. Examples of such masters are an ABB Advant Controller or another
drive.
1 125 Address. 1 125
70.02 CHANNEL 3 ADDR Node address for channel 3. No two nodes on-line may have the same
address. Typically the setting needs to be changed when the drive is
connected in a ring which consists of several drives and a PC with the
DriveWindow program running.
1 254 Address. 1 254
Motor
Speed
% of
nominal
Drooping
No Drooping
Speed Controller
100%
} Par. 60.06 DROOP RATE
Output / %
Speed Decrease =
Speed Controller Output Drooping Max. Speed
Example: Speed Controller output is 50%, DROOP RATE is
1%, maximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm.
Speed decrease = 0.50 0.01 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm
Drive load
100%
161
70.03 CH1 BAUDRATE The communication speed of channel 1. Typically the setting needs to be
changed only if the pulse encoder interface module is connected to channel 1
instead of channel 2. Then the speed must be changed to 4 Mbits. See also
parameter 50.05.
8 Mbits 8 megabits per second 0
70.04 CH0 DDCS HW
CONN
Selects the topology of the channel 0 link.
RING Devices are connected in a ring. 0
STAR Devices are connected in a star. 1
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL
Control of the Adaptive Program execution. For more information, see the
Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE 64527274 [English]).
83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD Selects the operation mode for the Adaptive Program.
STOP Stop. The program cannot be edited.
START Run. The program cannot be edited.
EDIT Stop to edit mode. Program can be edited.
83.02 EDIT COMMAND Selects the command for the block placed in the location defined by parameter
83.03. The program must be in editing mode (see parameter 83.01).
NO Home value. The value automatically restores to NO after an editing command
has been executed.
PUSH Shifts the block in location defined by parameter 83.03 and the following blocks
one location up. A new block can be placed in the emptied location by
programming the Block Parameter Set as usual.
Example: A new block needs to be placed in between the current block
number four (parameters 84.20 84.25) and five (parameters 84.25
84.29).
In order to do this:
- Shift the program to the editing mode by parameter 83.01.
- Select location number five as the desired location for the new block by
parameter 83.03.
- Shift the block in location number 5 and the following blocks one location
forward by parameter 83.02.(selection PUSH )
- Program the emptied location number 5 by parameters 84.25 to 84.29 as
usual.
DELETE Deletes the block in location defined by parameter 83.03 and shifts the
following blocks one step down.
162
PROTECT Activation of the Adaptive Program protection. Activate as follows:
- Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP (parameter
83.01).
- Set the passcode (parameter 83.05).
- Change parameter 83.02 to PROTECT.
When activated:
- All parameters in group 84 excluding the block output parameters are hidden
(read protected).
- It is not possible to switch the program to the editing mode (parameter 83.01).
- Parameter 83.05 is set to 0.
UNPROTECT Inactivation of the Adaptive Program protection. Inactivate as follows:
- Ensure the Adaptive Program operation mode is START or STOP (parameter
83.01).
- Set the passcode (parameter 83.05).
- Change parameter 83.02 to UNPROTECT.
Note: If the passcode is lost, it is possible to reset the protection also by
changing the application macro setting (parameter 99.02).
83.03 EDIT BLOCK Defines the block location number for the command selected by parameter
83.02.
1 15 Block location number.
83.04 TIMELEVEL SEL Selects the execution cycle time for the Adaptive Program. The setting is valid
for all blocks.
12 ms 12 milliseconds
83.05 PASSCODE Sets the passcode for the Adaptive Program protection. The passcode is
needed at activation and inactivation of the protection. See parameter 83.02.
0 Passcode. The setting restores to 0 after the protection is activated/
inactivated. Note: When activating, write down the passcode and store it in a
safe place.
84 ADAPTIVE
PROGRAM
- selections of the function blocks and their input connections.
- diagnostics
For more information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide (code:
3AFE 64527274 [English]).
84.01 STATUS Shows the value of the Adaptive Program status word. The table below shows
the alternative bit states and the corresponding values on the panel display.
84.02 FAULTED PAR Points out the faulted parameter in the Adaptive Program.
Bit Display Meaning
0 1 Stopped
1 2 Running
2 4 Faulted
3 8 Editing
4 10 Checking
5 20 Pushing
6 40 Popping
8 100 Initialising
163
84.05 BLOCK1 Selects the function block for Block Parameter Set 1. See the Adaptive
Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE 64527274 [English]).
ABS
ADD
AND
COMPARE
EVENT
FILTER
MAX
MIN
MULDIV
NO
OR
PI
PI-BAL
SR
SWITCH-B
SWITCH-I
TOFF
TON
TRIGG
XOR
84.06 INPUT1 Selects the source for input I1 of Block Parameter Set 1.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
Parameter index or a constant value:
- Parameter pointer: Inversion, group, index and bit fields. The bit number is
effective only for blocks handling boolean inputs.
- Constant value: Inversion and constant fields. Inversion field must have value
C to enable the constant setting.
Example: The state of digital input DI2 is connected to Input 1 as follows:
- Set the source selection parameter (84.06) to +.01.17.01. (The application
program stores the state of digital input DI2 to bit 1 of actual signal 01.17.)
- If you need an inverted value, switch the sign of the pointer value
(-01.17.01.).
-
84.07 INPUT2 See parameter 84.06.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
See parameter 84.06. -
84.08 INPUT3 See parameter 84.06.
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
See parameter 84.06. -
84.09 OUTPUT Stores and displays the output of Block Parameter Set 1.

84.79 OUTPUT Stores the output of Block Parameter Set 15.
164
85 USER CONSTANTS
Storage of the Adaptive Program constants and messages. For more
information, see the Adaptive Program Application Guide (code: 3AFE
64527274 [English]).
85.01 CONSTANT1 Sets a constant for the Adaptive Program.
-8388608 to 8388607 Integer value.
85.11 STRING1 Stores a message to be used in the Adaptive Program (EVENT block).
MESSAGE1 Message
MESSAGE2 Message
MESSAGE3 Message
MESSAGE4 Message
MESSAGE5 Message
90 D SET REC ADDR
- Addresses into which the received fieldbus data-sets are written.
- Numbers of the main and auxiliary data sets.
The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02. For more information, see the chapter Fieldbus control.
90.01 AUX DS REF3 Selects the address into which the value of fieldbus reference REF3 is written.
0 8999 Parameter index
165
90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE Defines the data set from which the drive reads the Control Word, Reference
REF1 and Reference REF2.
1 255 Data set number
90.05 AUX DS SOURCE Defines the data set from which the drive reads References REF3, REF4 and
REF5.
1 255 Data set number
92 D SET TR ADDR
Main and Auxiliary Data Sets which the drive sends to the fieldbus master
station.
The parameters are visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02. For more information, see the chapter Fieldbus control.
92.01 MAIN DS STATUS
WORD
Stores the address from which the Main Status Word is read from. Fixed value,
not visible.
302 (fixed) Parameter index
92.02 MAIN DS ACT1 Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 1 is read to the Main Data
Set.
92.03 MAIN DS ACT2 Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 2 is read to the Main Data
Set.
92.04 AUX DS ACT3 Selects the address from which the Actual Signal 3 is read to the Auxiliary Data
Set.
Set.
Set.
96 EXTERNAL AO
Output signal selection and processing for the analogue extension module
(optional).
The parameters are visible only when the module is installed and activated by
parameter 98.06.
96.01 EXT AO1 Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module.
166
COM.REF4 See parameter 15.01. 15
96.02 INVERT EXT AO1 Activates the inversion of analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O extension
module.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active. The analogue signal is at a minimum level when the drive signal
indicated is at its maximum and vice versa.
65535
96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module.
Note: Actually, the setting 10 mA or 12 mA does not set the AO1 minimum but
fixes 10/12 mA to actual signal value zero.
Example: Motor speed is read through the analogue output.
- The motor nominal speed is 1000 rpm (parameter 99.08).
- 96.02 is NO.
- 96.05 is 100%.
The analogue output value as a function of the speed is shown below.
0 mA 0 mA 1
4 mA 4 mA 2
10 mA 10 mA 3
12 mA 12 mA 4
96.04 FILTER EXT AO1 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
extension module. See parameter 15.04.
0.00 10.00 s Filtering time constant 0 1000
96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO1 of the analogue I/O
10 1000% Scaling factor 100
10000
96.06 EXT AO2 Selects the signal connected to analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
extension module.
-1000
Analogue output
1000
mA
20
0 -500 500
Speed/rpm
10
12
4
1
2
3
4
0 mA
4 mA
10 mA
12 mA
Analogue output
signal minimum
1
2
3
4
1
2
167
COM.REF5 See parameter 15.01. 15
96.07 INVERT EXT AO2 Activates the inversion of analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O extension
module. The analogue signal is at its minimum level when the drive signal
indicated is at its maximum and vice versa.
NO Inactive 0
YES Active 65535
96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2 Defines the minimum value for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
0 mA 0 mA 1
4 mA 4 mA 2
10 mA 10 mA 3
12 mA 12 mA 4
96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
0.00 10.00 s Filtering time constant 0 1000
96.10 SCALE EXT AO2 Defines the scaling factor for analogue output AO2 of the analogue I/O
10 1000% Scaling factor 100
10000
96.11 EXT AO1 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96.11 of parameter 96.01. 1000 =
1 mA
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
96.12 EXT AO2 PTR Defines the source or constant for value PAR 96.12 of parameter 96.06. 1000 =
1 mA
-255.255.31
+255.255.31 / C.-
32768 C.32767
the difference.
-
168
98 OPTION MODULES
Activation of the option modules.
The parameter settings will remain the same even though the application
macro is changed (parameter 99.02).
98.01 ENCODER MODULE Activates the communication to the optional pulse encoder module. See also
parameter group 50 ENCODER MODULE.
NTAC Communication active. Module type: NTAC module. Connection interface:
Fibre optic DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see Installation
and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Code: 3AFY
58919730 [English]).
0
NO Inactive 1
RTAC-SLOT1 Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option
slot 1 of the drive.
2
RTAC-SLOT2 Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Option
slot 2 of the drive.
3
RTAC-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RTAC. Connection interface: Optional I/O
module adapter (AIMA) that communicates with the drive through a fibre optic
DDCS link.
Note: Module node number must be set to 16. For directions, see Users
Manual for RDIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64485733 [English]).
4
98.02 COMM. MODULE
LINK
Activates the external serial communication and selects the interface. See the
chapter Fieldbus control.
NO No communication 1
FIELDBUS The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 1 of the
drive, or via CH0 on the RDCO board. See also parameter group 51 COMM
MOD DATA.
2
ADVANT The drive communicates with an ABB Advant OCS system via CH0 on the
RDCO board (optional). See also parameter group 70 DDCS CONTROL.
3
STD MODBUS The drive communicates with a Modbus controller via the Modbus Adapter
Module (RMBA) in option slot 1 of the drive. See also parameter 52
STANDARD MODBUS.
4
CUSTOMISED The drive communicates via a customer specified link. The control sources are
defined by parameters 90.04 and 90.05.
5
98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 Activates the communication to the digital I/O extension module 1 (optional)
and defines the type and connection interface of the module.
Module inputs: See parameter 98.09 for the use of the inputs in the drive
application program.
Module outputs: See parameters 14.10 and 14.11 for selecting the drive states
that are indicated through the relay outputs.
NDIO Communication active. Module type: NDIO module. Connection interface:
58919730 [English]).
1
NO Inactive 2
RDIO-SLOT1 Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1
of the drive.
3
of the drive.
4
169
RDIO-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RDIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O
DDCS link.
5
58919730 [English]).
1
NO Inactive 2
of the drive.
3
of the drive.
4
DDCS link.
5
58919730 [English]).
1
NO Inactive 2
of the drive.
3
of the drive.
4
DDCS link.
5
170
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE Activates the communication to the analogue I/O extension module (optional),
Module inputs:
- Values AI5 and AI6 in the drive application program are connected to module
inputs 1 and 2.
- See parameters 98.13 and 98.14 for the signal type definitions.
Module outputs:
- See parameters 96.01 and 96.06 for selecting the drive signals that are
indicated through module outputs 1 and 2.
NAIO Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic
DDCS link.
58919730 [English]).
1
NO Communication inactive 2
RAIO-SLOT1 Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Option slot 1
of the drive.
3
of the drive.
4
RAIO-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O
DDCS link.
Manual for RAIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64484567 [English]).
5
98.07 COMM PROFILE Defines the profile on which the communication with the fieldbus or another
drive is based. Visible only when fieldbus communication is activated by
parameter 98.02.
ABB DRIVES ABB Drives profile.
GENERIC Generic drive profile. Typically used with the fieldbus modules that have the
type designation of form Rxxx (installed in the option slot of the drive).
CSA 2.8/3.0 Communication profile used by application program versions 2.8 and 3.0.
98.09 DI/O EXT1 DI FUNC Defines the naming of the inputs of digital I/O extension module 1 in the drive
application program. See parameter 98.03.
DI7,8 DI1 and DI2 of the module extend the number of input channels. The module
inputs are named DI7 and DI8.
1
REPL DI1,2 DI1 and DI2 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1 and DI2.
The inputs are named DI1 and DI2.
2
DI7,8,9 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module extend the number of input channels. The
module inputs are named DI7, DI8 and DI9
3
REPL DI1,2,3 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1, DI2
and DI3. The inputs are named DI1, DI2 and DI3.
4
1
2
171
DI10,11,12 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module extend the number of input channels. The
module inputs are named DI10, DI11 and DI12.
3
REPL DI4,5,6 DI1, DI2 and DI3 of the module replace the standard input channels DI1, DI2
and DI3. The inputs are named DI4, DI5 and DI6.
4
1
2
98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP Activates the communication to the analogue I/O extension module and
reserves the module for the use of the motor temperature measurement
function. The parameter also defines the type and connection interface of the
module.
For more information on the temperature measurement function, see
parameter group 35 MOT TEMP MEAS.
The use of the analogue inputs (AI) and outputs (AO) of the module is shown in
the table below.
Before setting the drive parameters, ensure the module hardware settings are
appropriate for the motor temperature measurement:
1. The module node number is 9.
2. The input signal type selections are the following:
- for one Pt 100 sensor measurement, set the range to 0 2 V.
- for two to three Pt 100 sensors or one to three PTC sensors, set the range to
0 10 V.
3. The operation mode selection is unipolar.
NAIO Communication active. Module type: NAIO. Connection interface: Fibre optic
DDCS link.
Note: Make the module hardware settings described above. For instructions,
see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules
(Code: 3AFY 58919730 [English]).
1
NO Inactive 2
Motor 1 temperature measurement
AO1 Feeds a constant current to motor 1 temperature sensor. The current
value depends on the setting of parameter 35.01:
- AO1 is 9.1 mA with selection 1xPT100
- AO1 is 1.6 mA with selection 1..3 PTC
AI1 Measures voltage over motor 1 temperature sensor.
Motor 2 temperature measurement
AO2 Feeds a constant current to motor 2 temperature sensor. The current
value depends on the setting of parameter 35.04:
- AO2 is 9.1 mA with selection 1xPT100,
- AO2 is 1.6 mA with selection 1..3 PTC
AI2 Measures voltage over motor 2 temperature sensor.
172
of the drive.
Note: Make the module hardware settings described above. The node number
is not required. For directions, see Users Manual for RAIO Module (Code:
3
of the drive.
Note: Make the module hardware settings described above. The node number
is not required. For directions, see Users Manual for RAIO Module (Code:
4
RAIO-DDCS Communication active. Module type: RAIO. Connection interface: Optional I/O
DDCS link.
Note: Set the module node number to 9. For directions, see Users Manual for
RAIO Module (Code: 3AFE 64484567 [English]).
5
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC Defines the signal type for input 1 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI5 in
the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to
the module.
Note: The communication must be activated by parameter 98.06.
UNIPOLAR AI5 Unipolar 1
BIPOLAR AI5 Bipolar 2
98.14 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC Defines the signal type for input 2 of the analogue I/O extension module (AI6 in
the drive application program). The setting must match the signal connected to
the module.
Note: The communication must be activated by parameter 98.06.
UNIPOLAR AI6 Unipolar 1
BIPOLAR AI6 Bipolar 2
99 START-UP DATA
Language selection. Definition of motor set-up data.
99.01 LANGUAGE Selects the display language.
ENGLISH British English 0
ENGLISH(AM) American English. If selected, the unit of power used is HP instead of kW. 1
DEUTSCH German 2
ITALIANO Italian 3
ESPANOL Spanish 4
PORTUGUES Portuguese 5
NEDERLANDS Dutch 6
FRANCAIS French 7
DANSK Danish 8
SUOMI Finnish 9
SVENSKA Swedish 10
CESKY Czech 11
POLSKI Polish 12
PO-RUSSKI Russian 13
173
99.02 APPLICATION
MACRO
Selects the application macro. See the chapter Application macros for more
information.
Note: When you change the default parameter values of a macro, the new
settings become valid immediately and stay valid even if the power of the drive
is switched off and on. However, backup of the default parameter settings
(factory settings) of each standard macro is still available. See parameter
99.03.
FACTORY Factory for basic applications 1
HAND/AUTO Two control devices are connected to the drive:
- device 1 device communicates through the interface defined by external
control location EXT1.
- device 2 communicates through the interface defined by external control
location EXT2.
- EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time. Switching through a digital input.
2
PID-CTRL PID control. For application in which the drive controls a process value. E.g.
pressure control by the drive running the pressure boost pump. Measured
pressure and the pressure reference are connected to the drive.
3
T-CTRL Torque Control macro 4
SEQ CTRL Sequential Control macro. For applications that are frequently run through a
pre-defined speed pattern (constant speeds and acceleration and deceleration
ramps).
5
USER 1 LOAD User 1 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter
settings and the motor model are suitable for the application.
6
USER 1 SAVE Save User 1 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor
model.
Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See
parameter 99.03.
7
USER 2 LOAD User 2 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that the saved parameter
settings and the motor model are suitable for the application.
8
USER 2 SAVE Save User 2 macro. Stores the current parameter settings and the motor
model.
Note: There are parameters that are not included in the macros. See
parameter 99.03.
9
99.03 APPLIC RESTORE Restores the original settings of the active application macro (99.02).
- If a standard macro (Factory, ... , Sequential Control) is active, the parameter
values are restored to the default settings (factory settings). Exceptions:
parameter settings in parameter group 99 remain unchanged. The motor
model remains unchanged.
- If User Macro 1 or 2 is active, the parameter values are restored to the last
saved values. In addition, the last saved motor model are restored. Exceptions:
Settings of parameters 16.05 and 99.02 remain unchanged.
Note: The parameter settings and the motor model are restored according to
the same principles when a macro is changed to another.
NO No restoring 0
YES Restoring 1
99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode.
DTC Direct Torque Control mode is suitable for most applications. 0
174
SCALAR Scalar control is suitable in special cases where the DTC cannot be applied.
The scalar control mode is recommended:
- for multimotor drives with variable number of motors
- when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output
current of the drive (inverter)
- the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
Note: The outstanding motor control accuracy of the DTC cannot be achieved
in scalar control. The differences between the scalar and DTC control modes
are pointed out in this manual in relevant parameter lists. There are some
standard features that are disabled in the scalar control mode: Motor
Identification Run (group 99 START-UP DATA), Speed Limits (group 20
LIMITS), Torque Limit (group 20 LIMITS), DC Hold (group 21 START/STOP),
DC Magnetizing (group 21 START/STOP), Speed Controller Tuning (group 23
SPEED CTRL), Torque Control (group 24 TORQUE CTRL), Flux Optimization
(group 26 MOTOR CONTROL), Flux Braking (group 26 MOTOR CONTROL),
Underload Function (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS), Motor Phase Loss
Protection (group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS), Motor Stall Protection (group 30
FAULT FUNCTIONS).
1
99.05 MOTOR NOM
VOLTAGE
Defines the nominal motor voltage. Must be equal to the value on the motor
rating plate.
1/2 2 UN Voltage. Allowed range is 1/2 2 U
N
of the drive.
Note: The stress on the motor insulations is always dependent on the drive
supply voltage. This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating is
lower than the rating of the drive and the supply of the drive.
1 = 1 V
99.06 MOTOR NOM
CURRENT
Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value on the motor
rating plate.
Note: Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor
does not exceed 90 percent of the nominal current of the inverter.
0 2 I
2hd
Allowed range: approx. 1/6

2 I
2hd
of ACS800 (parameter 99.04 = DTC).
Allowed range: approx. 0 2 I
2hd
of ACS800 (parameter 99.04 = SCALAR).
1 = 0.1 A
99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ Defines the nominal motor frequency.
8 300 Hz Nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz typically) 800
30000
99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the value on the motor
rating plate. The motor synchronous speed or another approximate value must
not be given instead!
Note: If the value of parameter 99.08 is changed, the speed limits in parameter
group 20 LIMITS change automatically as well.
1 18000 rpm Nominal motor speed 1 18000
99.09 MOTOR NOM
POWER
Defines the nominal motor power. Set exactly as on the motor rating plate.
0 9000 kW Nominal motor power 0 90000
175
99.10 MOTOR ID RUN
MODE
Selects the type of the motor identification. During the identification, the drive
will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID
Run Procedure is described in the chapter Start-up; and control through the I/
O.
Note: The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) should be selected if:
- The operation point is near zero speed, and/or
- Operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within a wide
speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
Note: The ID Run (STANDARD or REDUCED) cannot be performed if
ID MAGN No ID Run. The motor model is calculated at first start by magnetising the
motor for 20 to 60 s at zero speed. This can be selected in most applications.
1
STANDARD Standard ID Run. Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The ID Run
takes about one minute.
Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven equipment.
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run.
During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80% of the
nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
2
REDUCED Reduced ID Run. Should be selected instead of the Standard ID Run:
- if mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the motor cannot be de-
coupled from the driven equipment)
- if flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (i.e. in case of a
motor with an integrated brake supplied from the motor terminals).
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting the ID Run.
During the run, the motor will rotate in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80% of the
nominal speed during the ID Run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
3
99.11 DEVICE NAME Defines the name for the drive or application. The name is visible on the
control panel display in the Drive Selection Mode. Note: The name can be
typed only by using a drive PC tool.
176
Fault tracing
177
Fault tracing
Chapter overview
The chapter lists all warning and fault messages including the possible cause and
corrective actions.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. The Safety
Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual must be read
before you start working with the drive.
Warning and fault indications
A warning or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status.
Most warning and fault causes can be identified and corrected using this information.
If not, an ABB representative should be contacted.
If the drive is operated with the control panel detached, the red LED in the panel
mounting platform indicates the fault condition. (Note: Some drive types are not fitted
with the LEDs as standard).
The four digit code number in brackets after the message is for the fieldbus
communication (see the chapter Fieldbus control).
How to reset
The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad RESET key, by digital input or
fieldbus, or switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been
removed, the motor can be restarted.
Fault history
When a fault is detected, it is stored in the Fault History. The latest faults and
warnings are stored together with the time stamp at which the event was detected.
See the chapter Control panel for more information.
Fault tracing
178
Warning messages generated by the drive
WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO
ACS 800 TEMP
(4210)
The drive temperature is excessive.
A warning is given if the inverter module
temperature exceeds 115 C.
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against unit power.
AI < MIN FUNC
(8110)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.01)
An analogue control signal is below minimum
allowed value. This can be caused by incorrect
signal level or a failure in the control wiring.
Check for proper analogue control signal
levels.
Check the control wiring.
Check Fault Function parameters.
BACKUP USED A PC-stored backup of drive parameters is
downloaded into use.
Wait until download is completed.
BRAKE ACKN
(ff74)
Unexpected state of brake acknowledge
signal.
See parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL.
Check connection of brake acknowledgement
signal.
BR OVERHEAT
(7112)
Brake resistor overload. Stop drive. Let resistor cool down.
Check parameter settings of resistor overload
protection function (see parameter group 27
BRAKE CHOPPER).
Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
CALIBRA REQ Calibration of output current transformers
required. Displayed at start if drive is in scalar
control (parameter 99.04) and scalar flystart
feature is on (parameter 21.08).
Calibration starts automatically. Wait for a
while.
CALIBRA DONE Calibration of output current transformers
completed.
Continue normal operation.
CHOKE OTEMP
(ff82)
Excessive temperature of drive output filter.
Supervision is in use in step-up drives.
Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient
temperature. Check filter fan rotates in correct
direction and air flows freely.
COMM MODULE
(7510)
(programmable
Fault Function)
Cyclical communication between the drive and
the master is lost.
Check the status of fieldbus communication.
See the chapter Fieldbus control, or
appropriate fieldbus adapter manual.
Check parameter settings:
- group 51 (for fieldbus adapter)
- group 52 (for Standard Modbus Link)
Check cable connections.
Check if the bus master is not configured, or
does not send/receive messages.
EARTH FAULT
(2330)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.17)
The load on the incoming mains system is out
of balance. This can be caused by a fault in the
motor, motor cable, or an internal malfunction.
Check motor.
Check motor cable.
Check there are no power factor correction
capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor
cable.
Fault tracing
179
ENCODER A<>B
(7302)
Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is
connected to terminal of phase B and vice
versa.
Interchange the connection of pulse encoder
phases A and B.
ENCODER ERR
(7301)
Communication fault between the pulse
encoder and the pulse encoder interface
module and between the module and the drive.
Check the pulse encoder and its wiring, the
pulse encoder interface module and its wiring,
parameter group 50 settings.
ID DONE The drive has performed the motor
identification magnetisation and is ready for
operation. This warning belongs to the normal
start-up procedure.
Continue drive operation.
ID MAGN Motor identification magnetisation is on. This
warning belongs to the normal start-up
procedure.
Wait until the drive indicates that motor
identification is completed.
ID MAGN REQ Motor identification is required. This warning
belongs to the normal start-up procedure. The
drive expects the user to select how the motor
identification should be performed: By
Identification Magnetisation or by ID Run.
Start the Identification Magnetisation by
pressing the Start key, or select the ID Run and
start (see parameter 99.10).
ID N CHANGED The ID number of the drive has been changed
from 1.
Change the ID number back to 1. See the
chapter Control panel.
ID RUN SEL Motor Identification Run is selected, and the
drive is ready to start the ID Run. This warning
belongs to the ID Run procedure.
Press Start key to start the Identification Run.
IO CONFIG An input or output of an optional I/O extension
module has been selected as a signal interface
in the application program but the
communication to the appropriate I/O
extension module has not been set
accordingly.
Check fault function description (parameter
30.22) and parameter group 98 OPTION
MODULES. Correct settings where necessary.
MACRO CHANGE Macro is restoring or User macro is being
saved.
Wait until the drive has finished the task.
MOTOR STALL
(7121)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.10)
The motor is operating in the stall region. This
can be caused by excessive load or insufficient
motor power.
Check motor load and the ratings of the drive.
MOTOR STARTS Motor Identification Run starts. This warning
belongs to the ID Run procedure.
Wait until the drive indicates that motor
identification is completed.
MOTOR TEMP
(4310)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.04 30.09)
The motor temperature is excessive. This can
be caused by excessive load, insufficient motor
power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up
data.
Check motor ratings, load and cooling.
Check start-up data.
Fault tracing
180
MOTOR 1 TEMP
(4312)
Measured motor temperature has exceeded
the alarm limit set by parameter 35.02.
Check the value of the alarm limit.
Check that the actual number of the sensors
corresponds to the parameter set value.
Let the motor cool down. Ensure proper motor
cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling
surfaces, etc.
MOTOR 2 TEMP
(4313)
the alarm limit set by parameter 35.05.
Check the value of the alarm limit.
Check that the actual number of the sensors
corresponds to the parameter set value.
Let the motor cool down. Ensure proper motor
cooling: Check cooling fan, clean cooling
surfaces, etc.
PANEL LOSS
(5300)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.02)
A control panel selected as the active control
location for the drive has ceased
communicating.
Check the panel connection (see the hardware
manual).
Check control panel connector.
Replace control panel in the mounting
platform.
REPLACE FAN Running time of the inverter cooling fan has
exceeded its estimated life time.
Change the fan. Reset fan run time counter
01.44.
POINTER ERROR Source selection (pointer) parameter points to
not existing parameter index.
Check source selection (pointer) parameter
settings.
SHORT CIRC
(2340) *
)
Short-circuit in the motor cable(s) or motor. Check motor and motor cable.
cable.
Output bridge of the converter unit is faulty. Consult ABB representative.
SLEEP MODE The sleep function has entered the sleeping
mode.
See parameter group 40 PID CONTROL.
SYNCRO SPEED The value of the motor nominal speed set to
parameter 99.08 is not correct: The value is too
near the synchronous speed of the motor.
Tolerance is 0.1%.
Check nominal speed from motor rating plate
and set parameter 99.08 exactly accordingly.
THERMISTOR
(4311)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.04 30.05)
The motor temperature is excessive. Motor
thermal protection mode selection is
THERMISTOR.
Check motor ratings and load.
Check thermistor connections to digital input
DI6.
UNDERLOAD
(ff6a)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.13)
Motor load is too low. This can be caused by a
release mechanism in the driven equipment.
Check for a problem in the driven equipment.
T MEAS ALM Motor temperature measurement is out of the
acceptable range.
Check connections of the motor temperature
measurement circuit. See parameter group 35
MOT TEMP MEAS for circuit diagram.
Fault tracing
181
Warning messages generated by the control panel
DOWNLOADING
FAILED
Download function of the panel has failed. No
data has been copied from panel to
drive.
Make sure the panel is in local mode.
Retry (there might be interference on the link).
Contact ABB representative.
DRIVE
INCOMPATIBLE
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
Program versions in the panel and drive do not
match. It is not possible to copy data from
panel to the drive.
Check program versions (see parameter group
33 INFORMATION).
DRIVE IS
RUNNING
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
Downloading is not possible while the motor is
running.
Stop motor. Perform downloading.
NO
COMMUNICATION
(X)
Cabling problem or a hardware malfunction on
the Panel Link.
Check Panel Link connections.
Press RESET key. The panel reset may take
up to half a minute, please wait.
(4) = Panel type not compatible with version of
the drive application program.
Check panel type and version of the drive
application program. The panel type is printed
on the cover of the panel. The application
program version is stored in parameter 33.02.
NO FREE ID
NUMBERS ID
NUMBER
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE
The Panel Link already includes 31 stations. Disconnect another station from the link to free
an ID number.
NOT UPLOADED
DOWNLOADING
NOT POSSIBLE
No upload function has been performed. Perform the upload function before
downloading. See the chapter Control panel.
UPLOADING
FAILED
Upload function of the panel has failed. No
data has been copied from the drive to the
panel.
Retry (there might be interference on the link).
Contact ABB representative.
WRITE ACCESS
DENIED
PARAMETER
SETTING NOT
POSSIBLE
Certain parameters do not allow changes while
motor is running. If tried, no change is
accepted, and a warning is displayed.
Stop motor, then change parameter value.
Parameter lock is on. Open the parameter lock (see parameter
16.02).
Fault tracing
182
Fault messages generated by the drive
FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO
AI < MIN FUNC
(8110)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.01)
Analogue control signal is below minimum
allowed value due to incorrect signal level or
failure in the control wiring.
Check for proper analogue control signal
levels.
Check control wiring.
BACKUP ERROR Failure when restoring PC-stored backup of
drive parameters.
Retry. Check connections. Check that
parameters are compatible with drive.
BC OVERHEAT
(7114)
Brake chopper overload. Stop drive. Let chopper cool down.
Check parameter settings of resistor overload
protection function (see parameter group 27
BRAKE CHOPPER).
Check that braking cycle meets allowed limits.
Check that the supply AC voltage of the drive
is not excessive.
CTRL B TEMP
(4110)
Control board temperature is below the
allowed minimum limit or exceeds the
maximum limit.
BRAKE ACKN
(ff74)
Unexpected state of the brake acknowledge
signal.
See parameter group 42 BRAKE CONTROL.
Check connection of the brake
acknowledgement signal.
BR BROKEN
(7111)
Brake resistor is not connected or it is
damaged.
The resistance rating of the brake resistor is
too high.
Check the resistor and the resistor connection.
Check that the resistance rating meets the
specification. See the Brake Chopper User's
Manual (code: 3AFE 64273507 [English]).
BR OVERHEAT
(7112)
Overload of the brake resistor. Stop drive. Let the resistor cool down.
Check parameter settings of the resistor
overload protection function (see parameter
group 27 BRAKE CHOPPER).
Check that braking cycle meets the allowed
limits.
Check that the supply AC voltage of the drive
is not excessive.
BC SHORT CIR
(7113)
Short circuit in brake chopper IGBT(s). Replace brake chopper. Ensure brake resistor
is connected and not damaged.
BR WIRING (7111) Wrong connection of brake resistor. Check resistor connection. Ensure brake
resistor is not damaged.
COMM MODULE
(7510)
(programmable
Fault Function)
Cyclical communication with drive and master
station is lost.
Check status of fieldbus communication. See
the chapter Fieldbus control, or appropriate
fieldbus adapter manual.
Check parameter settings:
- group 51 (for fieldbus adapter), or
- group 52 (for Standard Modbus Link)
Check cable connections.
Check if master can communicate.
Fault tracing
183
CURR MEAS
(2211)
Current transformer failure in output current
measurement circuit.
Check current transformer connections to Main
Circuit Interface Board, INT.
DC HIGH RUSH
(FF80)
Drive supply voltage is excessive. When
supply voltage is over 124% of the voltage
rating of the unit (415, 500 or 690 V), motor
speed rushes to trip level (40% of the nominal
speed).
Check supply voltage level, rated voltage of the
drive and allowed voltage range of the drive.
DC OVERVOLT
(3210)
Excessive intermediate circuit DC voltage. DC
overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 U
1max,
where

U
1max
is the maximum

value of the mains
voltage range. For 400 V units, U
1max
is 415 V.
For

500 V units, U
1max
is 500 V. Actual voltage
in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the
mains voltage trip level is 728 VDC for 400 V
units and 877 VDC for 500 V units.
Check that the overvoltage controller is on
(Parameter 20.05).
Check mains for static or transient overvoltage.
Check brake chopper and resistor (if used).
Check deceleration time.
Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable).
Retrofit the frequency converter with a brake
chopper and a brake resistor.
DC UNDERVOLT
(3220)
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient
due to missing mains phase, a blown fuse or a
rectifier bridge internal fault.
DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.65 U
1min,
where

U
1min
is the minimum value of the mains
voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units,

U
1min
is 380 V. Actual voltage in the
intermediate circuit corresponding to the mains
voltage trip level is 334 VDC
Check mains supply and fuses.
ENCODER A<>B
(7302)
Pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is
connected to terminal of phase B and vice
versa.
Interchange the connection of pulse encoder
phases A and B.
ENCODER ERR
(7301)
Communication fault between pulse encoder
and pulse encoder interface module or
between module and drive.
Check pulse encoder and its wiring, module
and its wiring and parameter group 50 settings.
EARTH FAULT
(2330)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.17
Load on the incoming mains system is out of
balance due to fault in the motor, motor cable
or an internal malfunction.
Check motor.
Check motor cable.
cable.
EXTERNAL FLT
(9000)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.03)
Fault in one of the external devices.
(This information is configured through one of
the programmable digital inputs.)
Check external devices for faults.
Check parameter 30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT.
FAN OVERTEMP
(ff83)
Excessive temperature of drive output filter fan.
Supervision is in use in step-up drives.
Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient
temperature. Check fan rotates in correct
ID RUN FAIL Motor ID Run is not completed successfully. Check maximum speed (Parameter 20.02). It
should be at least 80% of the nominal speed of
the motor (Parameter 99.08).
Fault tracing
184
IN CHOKE TEMP
(ff81)
Excessive input choke temperature. Stop drive. Let it cool down. Check ambient
temperature. Check that fan rotates in correct
I/O COMM ERR
(7000)
Communication error on the control board,
channel CH1.
Electromagnetic interference.
Check connections of fibre optic cables on
channel CH1.
Check all I/O modules (if present) connected to
channel CH1.
Check for proper earthing of the equipment.
Check for highly emissive components nearby.
LINE CONV (ff51) Fault on the line side converter. Shift panel from motor-side converter control
board to line-side converter control board.
See line side converter manual for fault
description.
MOTOR PHASE
(ff56)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.16)
One of the motor phases is lost due to fault in
the motor, motor cable, thermal relay (if used)
or internal fault.
Check motor and motor cable.
Check thermal relay (if used).
Check Fault Function parameters. Disable this
protection.
MOTOR TEMP
(4310)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.04 30.09)
Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be
too high) due to excessive load, insufficient
motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect
start-up data.
MOTOR 1 TEMP
(4312)
the fault limit set by parameter 35.03.
Check value of fault limit. Let the motor cool
down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check
cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc.
MOTOR 2 TEMP
(4313)
fault limit set by parameter 35.06.
Check value of fault limit. Let the motor cool
down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check
cooling fan, clean cooling surfaces, etc.
MOTOR STALL
(7121)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.10 30.12)
Motor is operating in the stall region due to e.g.
excessive load or insufficient motor power.
Check motor load and the drive ratings.
NO MOT DATA
(ff52)
Motor data is not given or motor data does not
match with inverter data.
Check motor data given by parameters
99.04 99.09.
OVERCURRENT
(2310) *
)
Output current exceeds the trip limit. Check motor load.
Check acceleration time.
Check motor and motor cable (including
phasing).
cable.
Check encoder cable (including phasing).
Fault tracing
185
OVERFREQ (7123) Motor is turning faster than the highest allowed
speed due to incorrectly set minimum/
maximum speed, insufficient braking torque or
changes in the load when using torque
reference.
Trip level is 40 Hz over the operating range
absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque
Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar
Control active). The operating range limits are
set by parameters 20.01 and 20.02 (DTC
mode active) or 20.07 and 20.08 (Scalar
Control active).
Check minimum/maximum speed settings.
Check adequacy of motor braking torque.
Check applicability of torque control.
Check need for a brake chopper and
resistor(s).
PANEL LOSS
(5300)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.02)
A control panel or Drives Window selected as
active control location for the drive has ceased
communicating.
Check panel connection (see appropriate
hardware manual).
Check control panel connector.
Replace control panel in the mounting
platform.
Check DrivesWindow connection.
PPCC LINK (5210)
*
)
Fibre optic link to the INT board is faulty. Check fibre optic cables.
SC (INU 1)
SC (INU 2)
SC (INU 3)
SC (INU 4)
*)
Short circuit in inverter unit of several parallel
inverter modules. The number refers to the
faulty inverter module number.
Check motor and motor cable.
Check power semiconductors (IGBT power
plates) of inverter module. (INU 1 stands for
inverter module 1 etc.).
INT board fibre optic connection fault in
inverter unit consisting of several parallel
inverter modules. The number refers to the
inverter module number.
Check connection from inverter module Main
Circuit Interface Board, INT to PPCC
Branching Unit, PBU. (Inverter module 1 is
connected to PBU CH1 etc.)
RUN DISABLE No Run enable signal received. Check the setting of parameter 16.01. Switch
on the signal or check the wiring of the
selected source.
SLOT OVERLAP Two option modules have the same connection
interface selection.
Check connection interface selections in group
98 OPTION MODULES.
START
INTERLOCK
No Start Interlock signal received. Check the circuit connected to the Start
Interlock input on the RMIO board.
SUPPLY PHASE
(3130)
Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating
due to missing mains phase, a blown fuse or a
rectifier bridge internal fault.
A trip occurs when the DC voltage ripple is 13
per cent of the DC voltage.
Check mains fuses.
Check for mains supply imbalance.
START INHIBIT
(ff7a)
Optional start inhibit hardware logic is
activated.
Check start inhibit circuit (GPS board).
Fault tracing
186
*
)
More detailed information on the high power units with parallel inverters is given in fault word 03.12.
ACS 800 TEMP
(4210)
Excessive internal temperature. Trip level of
inverter module temperature is 125 C.
Check ambient conditions.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against unit power.
THERMISTOR
(4311)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.04 30.05)
Excessive motor temperature (detected by the
motor thermal protection function, which has
selection THERMISTOR active) .
Check thermistor connections.
Check thermistor cabling.
USER MACRO No User Macro saved or the file is defective. Create User Macro.
UNDERLOAD
(ff6a)
(programmable
Fault Function
30.13 30.15)
Motor load is too low due to e.g. release
mechanism in the driven equipment.
Check for a problem in the driven equipment.
THERMAL MODE Motor thermal protection mode is set to DTC
for a high-power motor.
Fieldbus control
187
Fieldbus control
Chapter overview
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a
communication network.
System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system usually a fieldbus
controller via an adapter module mounted in expansion slot 1 of the drive. (For
connection to an Advant Fieldbus 100 system, an external AF 100 interface is used.)
Figure 1 Fieldbus control.
Fieldbus
Other
devices
Fieldbus
Controller
Slot 1 or 2
Control Word (CW)
References (REF1REF5)
Data Flow
Status Word (SW)
Actual Values (ACT1ACT5)
Parameter R/W Requests/Responses
CH0
(DDCS)
ACS800
Slot 1
RDCO Comm.
Module
R
M
I
O

B
o
a
r
d
RMBA-0x Adapter
Std. Modbus Link
Fieldbus Adapter
Process I/O (Cyclic)
Service Messages (Acyclic)
Rxxx
Fieldbus Adapter
Nxxx
or
AF 100 Interface
(eg. AC 80)
Fieldbus control
188
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus
interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other
available sources, e.g. digital and analogue inputs.
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module
Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the adapter module must be
mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the
Hardware Manual of the drive, and the module manual.
The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is then
activated by setting parameter 98.02. After the communication is initialised, the
configuration parameters of the module become available in the drive at parameter
group 51.
Table 1 Communication set-up parameters for fieldbus adapter connection.
Parameter Alternative
settings
Setting for
fieldbus control
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION
98.02 NO; FIELDBUS;
ADVANT; STD
MODBUS;
CUSTOMISED
FIELDBUS Initialises communication between drive
and fieldbus adapter module. Activates
module set-up parameters (Group 51).
98.07 ABB DRIVES;
GENERIC;
CSA 2.8/3.0
ABB DRIVES,
GENERIC or
CSA 2.8/3.0
Selects the communication profile used by
the drive. See section Communication
Profiles below.
ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION
51.01 MODULE TYPE Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter
module.
51.02 (FIELDBUS
PARAMETER 2)
These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the module manual.
Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily visible.

51.26 (FIELDBUS
PARAMETER 26)
51.27 FBA PAR
REFRESH*
(0) DONE;
(1) REFRESHING..
Validates any changed fieldbus parameter
settings. After refreshing, the value reverts
automatically to DONE.
51.28 FBA CPI FW
REV*
xyz (binary coded
decimal)
Displays the CPI firmware revision of the
adapter module. x = major revision number;
y = minor revision number; z = correction
number. Example: 107 = revision 1.07.
Fieldbus control
189
After the parameters in group 51 have been set, the drive control parameters (shown
in Table 4) must be checked and adjusted where necessary.
The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when
parameter 51.27 is activated.
51.29 FBA CONFIG
ID*
xyz (binary coded
decimal)
Displays the adapter module configuration
file identification stored in the memory of
the ACS 800. This information is used by
the application program. x = major revision
number; y = minor revision number;
z = correction number. Example: 101 =
revision 1.01.
51.30 FBA CONFIG
REV*
xyz (binary coded
decimal)
Displays the adapter module configuration
file revision stored in the memory of the
ACS 800. x = major revision number;
y = minor revision number; z = correction
number. Example: 1 = revision 0.01.
51.31 FBA STATUS (0) IDLE;
(1) EXEC. INIT;
(2) TIME OUT;
(3) CONFIG
ERROR;
(4) OFF-LINE;
(5) ON-LINE;
(6) RESET
Displays the status of the adapter module.
Note: With type Nxxx adapter modules, the
value is always IDLE.
IDLE = Adapter not configured.
EXEC. INIT = Adapter initialising.
TIME OUT = A timeout has occurred in the
communication between the adapter and
the drive.
CONFIG ERROR = Adapter configuration
error. The major or minor revision code of
the CPI firmware revision stored in the
adapter differs from that stated in the
configuration file in the memory of the drive.
OFF-LINE = Adapter is off-line.
ON-LINE = Adapter is on-line.
RESET = Adapter performing a hardware
reset.
*Parameters 51.27 to 51.30 are only visible with a type Rxxx fieldbus adapter installed.
settings
Setting for
fieldbus control
Fieldbus control
190
Control through the Standard Modbus Link
An RMBA-01 Modbus Adapter installed in slot 1 or 2 of the drive forms an interface
called the Standard Modbus Link. The Standard Modbus Link can be used for
external control of the drive by a Modbus controller (RTU protocol only).
It is possible to switch the control between the Standard Modbus Link and another
fieldbus adapter, in which case the RMBA-01 is installed in slot 2, the fieldbus
adapter in slot 1.
Communication set-up
The communication through the Standard Modbus Link is initialised by setting
parameter 98.02 to STD MODBUS. Then, the communication parameters in group
52 must be adjusted. See the table below.
Table 2 Communication set-up parameters for the Standard Modbus Link.
After the parameters in group 52 have been set, the drive control parameters (shown
in Table 4) should be checked and adjusted where necessary.
Settings
Setting for Control
through the Standard
Modbus Link
98.02 NO; FIELDBUS;
ADVANT; STD
MODBUS;
CUSTOMISED
STD MODBUS Initialises communication between drive
(Standard Modbus Link) and Modbus-
protocol controller. Activates
communication parameters in group 52.
98.07 ABB DRIVES;
GENERIC;
CSA 2.8/3.0
ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by
Profiles below.
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
52.01 1 to 247 Specifies the station number of the drive
on the Standard Modbus Link.
52.02 600; 1200; 2400;
4800; 9600; 19200
Communication speed for the Standard
Modbus Link.
52.03 ODD; EVEN;
NONE1STOPBIT;
NONE2STOPBIT
Parity setting for the Standard Modbus
Link.
Fieldbus control
191
Modbus addressing
In the Modbus controller memory, the Control Word, the Status Word, the
references, and the actual values are mapped as follows:
More information on Modbus communication is available from the Modicon website
http:\\www.modicon.com.
Data from fieldbus controller to drive Data from drive to fieldbus controller
Address Contents Address Contents
40001 Control Word 40004 Status Word
40002 Reference 1 40005 Actual 1
Fieldbus control
192
Setting up an Advant Fieldbus 100 (AF 100) connection
The connection of a drive to an AF (Advant Fieldbus) 100 bus is similar to other
fieldbusses, with the exception that one of the AF 100 interfaces listed below is
substituted for the fieldbus adapter. The AF 100 interface is connected to channel
CH0 on the RDCO board inside the drive using fibre optic cables.
The following is a list of suitable AF 100 interfaces:
CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI)
TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required
Advant Controller 70 (AC 70)
TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required
Advant Controller 80 (AC 80)
Optical ModuleBus connection: TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical
ModuleBus Port Interface required
DriveBus connection: Connectible to RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-01
Communication Option.
One of the above interfaces may already be present on the AF 100 bus. If not, an
Advant Fieldbus 100 Adapter kit (NAFA-01) is separately available, containing the
CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface, TB810 and TB811 Optical ModuleBus
Port Interfaces, and a TC505 Trunk Tap. (More information on these components is
available from the S800 I/O Users Guide, 3BSE 008 878 [ABB Industrial Systems,
Vsters, Sweden]).
Optical component types
The TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface is equipped with 5 MBd optical
components, while the TB810 has 10 MBd components. All optical components on a
fibre optic link must be of the same type since 5 MBd components do not
communicate with 10 MBd components. The choice between TB810 and TB811
depends on the equipment it is connected to.
The TB811 (5 MBd) should be used when connecting to a drive with the following
equipment:
RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-02 Communication Option
RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-03 Communication Option.
The TB810 (10 MBd) should be used when connecting to the following equipment:
RMIO-01/02 Board with RDCO-01 Communication Option
NDBU-85/95 DDCS Branching Units.
Fieldbus control
193
Communication Set-up
The communication between the drive and the AF 100 interface is activated by
setting parameter 98.02 to ADVANT.
Table 3 Communication set-up parameters for AF 100 connection.
After the communication activation parameters have been set, the AF 100 interface
must be programmed according to its documentation, and the drive control
parameters (shown in Table 4) checked and adjusted where necessary.
In an Optical ModuleBus connection, the channel 0 address (parameter 70.01) is
calculated from the value of the POSITION terminal in the appropriate database
element (for the AC 80, DRISTD) as follows:
1. Multiply the hundreds of the value of POSITION by 16.
2. Add the tens and ones of the value of POSITION to the result.
For example, if the POSITION terminal of the DRISTD database element has the
value of 110 (the tenth drive on the Optical ModuleBus ring), parameter 70.01 must
be set to 16 1 + 10 = 26.
In an AC 80 DriveBus connection, the drives are addressed 1 to 12. The drive
address (set with parameter 70.01) is related to the value of the DRNR terminal of
ACSRX PC element.
Parameter Alternative Settings Setting for Control
through CH0
98.02 NO; FIELDBUS;
ADVANT; STD
MODBUS,
CUSTOMISED
ADVANT Initialises communication between drive
(fibre optic channel CH0) and AF 100
interface. The transmission speed is
4 Mbit/s.
98.07 ABB DRIVES;
GENERIC; CSA 2.8/3.0
ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by
Profiles below.
Fieldbus control
194
Drive control parameters
After the fieldbus communication has been set up, the drive control parameters
listed in Table 4 below should be checked and adjusted where necessary.
The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus
interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The
Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
The fieldbus signal routes and message composition are explained later under The
fieldbus control interface.
Table 4 Drive control parameters to be checked and adjusted for fieldbus control.
Parameter Setting for
fieldbus control
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION
10.01 COMM.CW Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except bit 11)
when EXT1 is selected as the active control location.
See also par. 10.07.
10.02 COMM.CW Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except bit 11)
when EXT2 is selected as the active control location.
10.03 FORWARD, REVERSE or
REQUEST
Enables rotation direction control as defined by
parameters 10.01 and 10.02. The direction control is
explained later under Reference handling.
10.07 0 or 1 Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par.
10.01 so that the fieldbus Control Word (except bit 11)
is enabled when EXT1 is selected as the active control
location.
Note 1: Only visible with the Generic Drive
communication profile selected (see par. 98.07).
Note 2: Setting not saved into permanent memory.
10.08 0 or 1 Setting the value to 1 overrides the setting of par.
11.03 so that Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when
EXT1 is selected as the active control location.
Note 1: Only visible with the Generic Drive
communication profile selected (see par. 98.07).
Note 2: Setting not saved into permanent memory.
11.02 COMM.CW(11) Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection by fieldbus Control
Word bit 11 EXT CTRL LOC.
11.03 COMM.REF1,
FAST COMM,
COM.REF1+AI1,
COM.REF1+AI5,
COM.REF1*AI1 or
COM.REF1*AI5
Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is
selected as the active control location. See section
References below for information on the alternative
settings.
Fieldbus control
195
11.06 COMM.REF2,
FAST COMM,
COM.REF2+AI1,
COM.REF2+AI5,
COM.REF2*AI1 or
COM.REF2*AI5
Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is
selected as the active control location. See section
References below for information on the alternative
settings.
OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION
14.01 COM.REF3(13) Enables Relay output RO1 control by fieldbus
reference REF3 bit 13.
15.01 COMM.REF4 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF4 to
Analogue output AO1. Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA
15.06 COMM.REF5 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF5 to
Analogue output AO2. Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS
16.01 COMM.CW(3) Enables the control of the Run Enable signal through
fieldbus Control Word bit 3.
Note: Must be set to YES when the Generic Drive
communication profile is selected (see par. 98.07).
16.04 COMM.CW(7) Enables fault reset through fieldbus Control Word
bit 7.
16.07 DONE; SAVE Saves parameter value changes (including those
made through fieldbus control) to permanent memory.
COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.18 FAULT; NO; CONST SP15;
LAST SPEED
Determines drive action in case fieldbus
communication is lost.
Note: The communication loss detection is based on
monitoring of received Main and Auxiliary data sets
(whose sources are selected with parameters 90.04
and 90.05 respectively).
30.19 0.1 60.0 s Defines the time between Main Reference data set
loss detection and the action selected with parameter
30.18.
30.20 ZERO; LAST VALUE Determines the state in which Relay outputs RO1 to
RO3 and Analogue outputs AO1 and AO2 are left
upon loss of the Auxiliary Reference data set.
fieldbus control
Fieldbus control
196
30.21 0.0 60.0 s Defines the time between Auxiliary Reference data set
loss detection and the action selected with parameter
30.18.
Note: This supervision function is disabled if this
parameter, or parameters 90.01, 90.02 and 90.03 are
set to 0.
FIELDBUS REFERENCE TARGET SELECTION (Not visible when 98.02 is set to NO.)
90.01 0 8999 Defines the drive parameter into which the value of
fieldbus reference REF3 is written.
Format: xxyy, where xx = parameter group (10 to 89),
yy = parameter Index. E.g. 3001 = parameter 30.01.
Format: see parameter 90.01.
90.04 1 (Fieldbus Control) or
81 (Standard Modbus
Control)
If 98.02 is set to CUSTOMISED, this parameter
selects the source from which the drive reads the Main
Reference data set (comprising the fieldbus Control
Word, fieldbus reference REF1, and fieldbus
reference REF2).
90.05 3 (Fieldbus Control) or
83 (Standard Modbus
Control)
If 98.02 is set to CUSTOMISED, this parameter
selects the source from which the drive reads the
Auxiliary Reference data set (comprising fieldbus
references REF3, REF4 and REF5).
ACTUAL SIGNAL SELECTION FOR FIELDBUS (Not visible when 98.02 is set to NO.)
92.01 302 (Fixed) The Status Word is transmitted to as the first word of
the Main Actual Signal data set.
92.02 0 9999 Selects the Actual signal or parameter value to be
transmitted as the second word (ACT1) of the Main
Actual Signal data set.
Format: (x)xyy, where (x)x = actual signal group or
parameter group, yy = actual signal or parameter
index. E.g. 103 = actual signal 1.03 FREQUENCY;
2202 = parameter 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1.
Note: With the Generic Drive communication profile
active (par. 98.07 = GENERIC), this parameter is fixed
to 102 (actual signal 1.02 SPEED in DTC motor
control mode) or 103 (1.03 FREQUENCY in Scalar
mode).
transmitted as the third word (ACT2) of the Main
fieldbus control
Fieldbus control
197
transmitted as the first word (ACT3) of the Auxiliary
transmitted as the second word (ACT4) of the
Auxiliary Actual Signal data set.
transmitted as the third word (ACT5) of the Auxiliary
fieldbus control
Fieldbus control
198
The fieldbus control interface
The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive employs data sets.
One data set (abbreviated DS) consists of three 16-bit words called data words
(DW). The ACS 800 Standard Application Program supports the use of four data
sets, two in each direction.
The two data sets for controlling the drive are referred to as the Main Reference data
set and the Auxiliary Reference data set. The sources from which the drive reads the
Main and Auxiliary Reference data sets are defined by parameters 90.04 and 90.05
respectively. The contents of the Main Reference data set are fixed. The contents of
the Auxiliary Reference data set can be selected using parameters 90.01, 90.02 and
90.03.
The two data sets containing actual information on the drive are referred to as the
Main Actual Signal data set and the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set. The contents of
both data sets are partly selectable with the parameters at group 92.
*With the Generic Drive communication profile active, Actual 1 is fixed to actual
signal 01.02 SPEED (in DTC motor control mode) or 01.03 FREQUENCY (in Scalar
mode).
The update time for the Main Reference and Main Actual Signal data sets is 6
milliseconds; for the Auxiliary Reference and Auxiliary Actual Signal data sets, it is
100 milliseconds.
Data from fieldbus controller to drive Data from drive to fieldbus controller
Word Contents Selector Word Contents Selector
Main Reference data set Main Actual Signal data set
1st word Control Word (Fixed) 1st word Status Word (Fixed)
2nd word Reference 1 (Fixed) 2nd word Actual 1 *Par. 92.02
3rd word Reference 2 (Fixed) 3rd word Actual 2 Par. 92.03
Auxiliary Reference data set Aux. Actual Signal data set
1st word Reference 3 Par. 90.01 1st word Actual 3 Par. 92.04
2nd word Reference 4 Par. 90.02 2nd word Actual 4 Par. 92.05
3rd word Reference 5 Par. 90.03 3rd word Actual 5 Par. 92.06
Fieldbus control
199
The Control Word and the Status Word
The Control Word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. It is effective when the active control location (EXT1 or EXT2, see
parameters 10.01 and 10.02) is set to COMM.CW, or if par. 10.07 is set to 1 (with
Generic Drive communication profile only).
The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive switches
between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control Word.
The Status Word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to
the fieldbus controller.
See text under Communication profiles below for information on the composition of
the Control Word and the Status Word.
References
References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (indicating
reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the twos complement from
the corresponding positive reference value.
Fieldbus reference selection and correction
Fieldbus reference (called COM.REF in signal selection contexts) is selected by
setting a Reference selection parameter 11.03 or 11.06 to COMM.REFx, FAST
COMM, COM.REFx+AI1, COM.REFx+AI5, COM.REFx*AI1 or COM.REFx*AI5.
(With Generic Drive communication profile, fieldbus reference is also selected when
par. 10.08 is set to 1.) The latter four selections enable correction of the fieldbus
reference using analogue inputs as shown below. (An optional RAIO-01 Analogue
I/O Extension Module is required for use of Analogue input AI5).
COMM.REF1 (in 11.03) or COMM.REF2 (in 11.06)
The fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction.
FAST COMM
The fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. The reference is
read every 2 milliseconds if either of the following conditions is met:
Control location is EXT1, par. 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is DTC, and par. 40.14
TRIM MODE is OFF
Control location is EXT2, par. 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is DTC, par. 40.14
TRIM MODE is OFF, and a torque reference is used.
In any other event, the fieldbus reference is read every 6 milliseconds.
Note: The FAST COMM selection disables the critical speed function.
Fieldbus control
200
COM.REF1+AI1; COM.REF1+AI5; COM.REF1*AI1; COM.REF1*AI5 (in 11.03)
COM.REF2+AI1; COM.REF2+AI5; COM.REF2*AI1; COM.REF2*AI5 (in 11.06)
These selections enable the correction of the fieldbus reference as follows:
Reference handling
The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location (EXT1 and
EXT2) using the parameters in group 10. Fieldbus references are bipolar, i.e. they
can be negative or positive. The following diagrams illustrate how group 10
parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the reference
REF1/REF2.
Note 2: With the ABB Drives communication profile, the limit Max.Ref. is defined
by parameters 11.05 (REF1) and 11.08 (REF2). With the Generic Drives
communication profile, the limit Max.Ref. is defined by parameters 99.08 (in DTC
motor control mode) or 99.07 (Scalar mode).
Note 3: External reference scaling parameters 11.04 and 11.07 are also in effect.
Note 4: The use of REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive communication
profile.
Parameter Setting Effect of AI1/AI5 Input Voltage on Fieldbus Reference
COM.REFx+AI1
COM.REFx+AI5
COM.REFx*AI1
COM.REFx*AI5
(100 + 0.5 [par. 13.03])%
100%
0
AI1/AI5 Input
Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
(100 0.5 [par. 13.03])%
5 V 10 V
Voltage
100%
0
AI1/AI5 Input
Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
0%
50%
5 V 10 V
Voltage
Fieldbus control
201
Actual Values
Actual Values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations
of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected with the parameters in group
92. The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depends on the
selected function; please refer to the chapter Actual signals and parameters.
*Direction determined by the sign of
COM.REF
Direction determined by digital command,
eg. digital input, control panel
par. 10.03
DIRECTION =
FORWARD
par. 10.03
DIRECTION =
REVERSE
par. 10.03
DIRECTION =
REQUEST
*Direction is determined by the sign of COM.REF when
par. 10.01/10.02 EXTx STRT/STP/DIR is set to COMM.CW
OR
par. 11.03/11.06 EXT REFx SELECT is set to FAST COMM.
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.Ref.
[Max.Ref.]
-100% 100%
Ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.Ref.
[Max.Ref.]
-100% 100%
Ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.Ref.
[Max.Ref.]
-100% 100%
Ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.Ref.
[Max.Ref.]
-100% 100%
Ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.Ref.
[Max.Ref.]
-100%
100%
Ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Fieldbus
-163%
Max.Ref.
[Max.Ref.]
-100% 100%
Ref. 1/2
Resultant
REF1/2
163%
Direction Command:
FORWARD
Direction Command:
REVERSE
Fieldbus control
202
123456789
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
9
7
9
8
9
9
D
A
T
A
D
S

1
D
S

2
D
S

3
D
S

4
D
S

5
D
S

3
3
M
A
I
N
D
A
T
A

S
E
T
R
E
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
R
E
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
P
A
R
A
M
E
T
E
R
1
0
.
0
1
1
0
.
0
2
8
9
.
9
9
T
A
B
L
E
3
0
.
2
0

C
O
M
M

F
L
T

R
O
/
A
O
3
0
.
2
1

A
U
X

R
E
F

D
S

T
-
O
U
T
9
0
.
0
1
9
0
.
0
2
9
0
.
0
3
3
0
.
1
8

C
O
M
M

F
A
U
L
T

F
U
N
C
B
i
t
s
1
3
1
5
A
n
a
l
o
g
u
e

O
u
t
p
u
t
A
O
1

(
s
e
e

1
5
.
0
1
)
A
n
a
l
o
g
u
e

O
u
t
p
u
t
A
O
2

(
s
e
e

1
5
.
0
6
)
S
E
T
T
A
B
L
E
N
O
F
I
E
L
D
-
A
D
V
A
N
T
S
T
D
C
U
S
T
O
M
-
B
U
S
M
O
D
B
U
S
I
S
E
D
9
8
.
0
2
N
O
F
I
E
L
D
-
A
D
V
A
N
T
S
T
D
C
U
S
T
O
M
-
B
U
S
M
O
D
B
U
S
I
S
E
D
9
8
.
0
2
C
W
R
E
F
1
R
E
F
2
R
E
F
3
R
E
F
4
R
E
F
5
D
A
T
A

S
E
T
R
e
l
a
y

O
u
t
p
u
t
s
(
s
e
e

1
4
.
0
1
1
4
.
0
3
)
3
0
.
1
8

C
O
M
M

F
A
U
L
T

F
U
N
C
3
0
.
1
9

M
A
I
N

R
E
F

D
S

T
-
O
U
T
F
i
e
l
d
b
u
s
A
d
a
p
t
e
r
S
l
o
t
1
F
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

s
e
l
e
c
t
o
r
s

i
n

G
r
o
u
p

5
1
*
*
A
d
d
r
e
s
s
e
s

f
o
r

w
o
r
d
s

3

n

i
n

f
o
r
m
a
t

x
x
y
y
x
x
A
d
d
r
e
s
s
0
0
y
y

=

w
o
r
d

n
o
.

i
n

d
a
t
a

s
e
t

t
a
b
l
e
0
1

9
9
x
x

=

p
a
r
.

g
r
o
u
p
y
y

=

p
a
r
.

i
n
d
e
x
i
n

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r

t
a
b
l
e
P
A
R
D
S
*

D
e
p
e
n
d
s

o
n

t
h
e

s
e
l
e
c
t
e
d

m
o
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

m
o
d
e

(
p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r

9
9
.
0
4
)
.
*
*

S
e
e

t
h
e

f
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

a
d
a
p
t
e
r

u
s
e
r
s

m
a
n
u
a
l

f
o
r

m
o
r
e

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.
W
o
r
d

1

(
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

w
o
r
d
)
W
o
r
d

2
(
S
p
e
e
d
/
f
r
e
q

r
e
f
.
*
)
W
o
r
d

3
W
o
r
d
s

1

n

*
*
W
o
r
d

n
P
A
R
D
S
3n
1
0
.
0
1
D
I
1
C
O
M
M
.
C
W
1
0
.
0
2
1
1
.
0
6
1
1
.
0
3
C
O
M
M
.
C
W
0
3
.
0
1
D
I
1
1
1
.
0
2
C
O
M
M
.
R
E
F
A
I
1
C
O
M
M
.
R
E
F
A
I
1
0
1
.
1
1
0
1
.
1
2
M
A
I
N

C
W
E
X
T

R
E
F
1
E
X
T

R
E
F
2
B
l
o
c
k

d
i
a
g
r
a
m
:

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

d
a
t
a

i
n
p
u
t

f
r
o
m

f
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

w
h
e
n

a

t
y
p
e

R
x
x
x

f
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

a
d
a
p
t
e
r

i
s

u
s
e
d
Fieldbus control
203
A
C
T
U
A
L

S
I
G
N
A
L
/
1
.
0
1
1
.
0
2
3
.
9
9
P
A
R
A
M
E
T
E
R
T
A
B
L
E
1
0
.
0
1
9
9
.
9
9
9
2
.
0
1
9
2
.
0
2
S
T
A
T
U
S

W
O
R
D
*
A
C
T
1
*
*
A
C
T
2
M
A
I
N
D
A
T
A

S
E
T
A
C
T
U
A
L

S
I
G
N
A
L
A
C
T
3
A
C
T
4
A
C
T
5
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
D
A
T
A

S
E
T
A
C
T
U
A
L

S
I
G
N
A
L
D
A
T
A

S
E
T
D
S

1
D
S

2
D
S

3
D
S

4
D
S

3
3
T
A
B
L
E
9
2
.
0
3
9
2
.
0
4
9
2
.
0
5
9
2
.
0
6
F
i
e
l
d
b
u
s
A
d
a
p
t
e
r
(
S
l
o
t

1
)
*

F
i
x
e
d

t
o

0
3
.
0
2

M
A
I
N

S
T
A
T
U
S

W
O
R
D
.
*
*

F
i
x
e
d

t
o

0
1
.
0
2

S
P
E
E
D

(
D
T
C

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
)

o
r

0
1
.
0
3

F
R
E
Q
U
E
N
C
Y

(
S
c
a
l
a
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
)

w
h
e
n

G
e
n
e
r
i
c

c
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
f
i
l
e

i
s

u
s
e
d
.
*
*
*

S
e
e

t
h
e

f
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

a
d
a
p
t
e
r

u
s
e
r
s

m
a
n
u
a
l

f
o
r

m
o
r
e

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.

**
*
1234567891
0
1
1
1
2
9
7
9
8
9
9
F
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

s
e
l
e
c
t
o
r
s

i
n

G
r
o
u
p

5
1

*
*
*
A
d
d
r
e
s
s
e
s

f
o
r

w
o
r
d
s

3

n

i
n

f
o
r
m
a
t

x
x
y
y
x
x
A
d
d
r
e
s
s
0
0
y
y

=

w
o
r
d

n
o
.

i
n

d
a
t
a

s
e
t

t
a
b
l
e
0
1

9
9
x
x

=

p
a
r
.

g
r
o
u
p
y
y

=

p
a
r
.

i
n
d
e
x
i
n

p
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r

t
a
b
l
e
W
o
r
d

1

(
S
T
A
T
U
S

W
O
R
D
)
W
o
r
d

2
(
A
C
T
1
*
*
)
W
o
r
d

3
W
o
r
d
s

1

n

*
*
*
W
o
r
d

n
P
A
R
D
S
P
A
R
D
S
3n
B
l
o
c
k

d
i
a
g
r
a
m
:

A
c
t
u
a
l

v
a
l
u
e

s
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

f
o
r

f
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

w
h
e
n

a

t
y
p
e

R
x
x
x

f
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

a
d
a
p
t
e
r

i
s

u
s
e
d
Fieldbus control
204
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
D
A
T
A
D
S

1
D
S

2
D
S

3
D
S

4
D
S

8
1
D
S

8
2
D
S

8
3
D
S

8
4
M
A
I
N
D
A
T
A

S
E
T
R
E
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
P
A
R
A
M
E
T
E
R
1
0
.
0
1
1
0
.
0
2
8
9
.
9
9
T
A
B
L
E
M
o
d
b
u
s
L
i
n
k
3
0
.
2
0

C
O
M
M

F
L
T

R
O
/
A
O
3
0
.
2
1

A
U
X

R
E
F

D
S

T
-
O
U
T
9
0
.
0
1
9
0
.
0
2
9
0
.
0
3
3
0
.
1
8

C
O
M
M

F
A
U
L
T

F
U
N
C
B
i
t
s
1
3
1
5
A
n
a
l
o
g
u
e

O
u
t
p
u
t
A
O
1

(
s
e
e

1
5
.
0
1
)
A
n
a
l
o
g
u
e

O
u
t
p
u
t
A
O
2

(
s
e
e

1
5
.
0
6
)
3
w
o
r
d
s
(
6

b
y
t
e
s
)
4
0
0
0
1
4
0
0
0
2
4
0
0
0
3
4
0
0
0
7
4
0
0
0
8
4
0
0
0
9
M
o
d
b
u
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
S
E
T
T
A
B
L
E
N
O
F
I
E
L
D
-
A
D
V
A
N
T
S
T
D
C
U
S
T
O
M
-
B
U
S
M
O
D
B
U
S
I
S
E
D
9
8
.
0
2
N
O
F
I
E
L
D
-
A
D
V
A
N
T
S
T
D
C
U
S
T
O
M
-
B
U
S
M
O
D
B
U
S
I
S
E
D
9
8
.
0
2
C
W
R
E
F
1
R
E
F
2
R
e
l
a
y

O
u
t
p
u
t
s
(
s
e
e

1
4
.
0
1
1
4
.
0
3
)
9
0
.
0
4
1
2
5
5
3
0
.
1
8

C
O
M
M

F
A
U
L
T

F
U
N
C
3
0
.
1
9

M
A
I
N

R
E
F

D
S

T
-
O
U
T
9
0
.
0
5
1
2
5
5
(
R
M
B
A
)
(
S
l
o
t

1
/
2
)
3
w
o
r
d
s
(
6

b
y
t
e
s
)
3
w
o
r
d
s
(
6

b
y
t
e
s
)
3
w
o
r
d
s
(
6

b
y
t
e
s
)
F
i
e
l
d
b
u
s
A
d
a
p
t
e
r
(
C
H
0
)
1
0
.
0
1
D
I
1
C
O
M
M
.
C
W
1
0
.
0
2
1
1
.
0
6
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
R
E
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
R
E
F
3
R
E
F
4
R
E
F
5
D
A
T
A

S
E
T
1
1
.
0
3
C
O
M
M
.
C
W
0
3
.
0
1
D
I
1
1
1
.
0
2
C
O
M
M
.
R
E
F
A
I
1
C
O
M
M
.
R
E
F
A
I
1
0
1
.
1
1
0
1
.
1
2
M
A
I
N

C
W
E
X
T

R
E
F
1
E
X
T

R
E
F
2
B
l
o
c
k

d
i
a
g
r
a
m
:

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

d
a
t
a

i
n
p
u
t

f
r
o
m

f
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

w
h
e
n

a

t
y
p
e

N
x
x
x

f
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

a
d
a
p
t
e
r

i
s

u
s
e
d
Fieldbus control
205
A
C
T
U
A
L

S
I
G
N
A
L
/
1
.
0
1
1
.
0
2
3
.
9
9
P
A
R
A
M
E
T
E
R
T
A
B
L
E
1
0
.
0
1
9
9
.
9
9
9
2
.
0
1
*
9
2
.
0
2
S
T
A
T
U
S

W
O
R
D
*
A
C
T
1
*
*
A
C
T
2
M
A
I
N
D
A
T
A

S
E
T
A
C
T
U
A
L

S
I
G
N
A
L
A
C
T
3
A
C
T
4
A
C
T
5
A
U
X
I
L
I
A
R
Y
D
A
T
A

S
E
T
A
C
T
U
A
L

S
I
G
N
A
L
D
A
T
A

S
E
T
D
S

1
D
S

2
D
S

3
D
S

4
D
S

8
1
D
S

8
2
D
S

8
3
D
S

8
4
T
A
B
L
E
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
M
o
d
b
u
s
L
i
n
k
9
2
.
0
3
9
2
.
0
4
9
2
.
0
5
9
2
.
0
6
4
0
0
0
4
4
0
0
0
5
4
0
0
0
6
4
0
0
1
0
4
0
0
1
1
4
0
0
1
2
M
o
d
b
u
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
F
i
e
l
d
b
u
s
A
d
a
p
t
e
r
(
C
H
0
)
3
w
o
r
d
s
3
w
o
r
d
s
(
6

b
y
t
e
s
)
3
w
o
r
d
s
(
6

b
y
t
e
s
)
3
w
o
r
d
s
(
6

b
y
t
e
s
)
*

F
i
x
e
d

t
o

0
3
.
0
2

M
A
I
N

S
T
A
T
U
S

W
O
R
D
.
*
*

F
i
x
e
d

t
o

0
1
.
0
2

S
P
E
E
D

(
D
T
C

m
o
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
)

o
r

0
1
0
3

F
R
E
Q
U
E
N
C
Y

(
S
c
a
l
a
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
)

w
h
e
n

G
e
n
e
r
i
c

c
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
f
i
l
e

i
s

u
s
e
d
.
(
6

b
y
t
e
s
)
B
l
o
c
k

D
i
a
g
r
a
m
:

A
c
t
u
a
l

v
a
l
u
e

s
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

f
o
r

f
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

w
h
e
n

a

t
y
p
e

N
x
x
x

f
i
e
l
d
b
u
s

a
d
a
p
t
e
r

i
s

u
s
e
d
Fieldbus control
206
Communication profiles
The ACS800 supports three communication profiles:
ABB Drives communication profile
Generic Drive communication profile.
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile.
The ABB Drives communication profile should be selected with type Nxxx fieldbus
adapter modules, and when the manufacturer-specific mode is selected (via the
PLC) with type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules.
The Generic Drive profile is supported by type Rxxx fieldbus adapter modules only.
The CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile can be selected for backward compatibility
with Application Program versions 2.8 and 3.0. This eliminates the need for
reprogramming the PLC when drives with the above-mentioned program versions
are replaced.
ABB Drives communication profile
The ABB Drives communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
ABB DRIVES. The Control Word, Status Word, and reference scaling for the profile
are described below.
The ABB Drives communication profile can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2.
The Control Word commands are in effect when par. 10.01 or 10.02 (whichever
control location is active) is set to COMM.CW.
Fieldbus control
207
Table 5 The Control Word (Actual Signal 3.01) for the ABB Drives communication
profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 2.
Bit Name Value Enter STATE/Description
0 OFF1 CONTROL 1 Enter READY TO OPERATE.
0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (22.03/22.05). Enter OFF1 ACTIVE;
proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
0 Emergency OFF, coast to stop.
Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
2 OFF3 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
0 Emergency stop, stop within time defined by par. 22.07. Enter OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed
to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Warning: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.
3 INHIBIT_
OPERATION
1 Enter OPERATION ENABLED. (Note: The Run Enable signal must be active; see
parameter 16.01. If par. 16.01 is set to COMM.CW(3), this bit also activates the Run
Enable signal.)
0 Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED.
4 RAMP_OUT_
ZERO
1 Normal operation.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED.
0 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero.
Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED.
0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
6 RAMP_IN_
ZERO
1 Normal operation. Enter OPERATING.
0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
7 RESET 0 1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Enter SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0 Continue normal operation.
8 INCHING_1 1 Not in use.
1 0 Not in use.
9 INCHING_2 1 Not in use.
1 0 Not in use.
10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
0 Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control Word and Reference.
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control enabled.
Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if par. 11.02 is set to COMM.CW(11).
0 Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if par. 11.02 is set to COMM.CW(11).
12
15
Reserved
Fieldbus control
208
Table 6 The Status Word (Actual Signal 3.02) for the ABB Drives communication
profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure 2.
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON.
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE.
0 OFF1 ACTIVE.
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED.
0 OPERATION INHIBITED.
3 TRIPPED 1 FAULT.
0 No fault.
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive.
0 OFF2 ACTIVE.
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive.
0 OFF3 ACTIVE.
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
0
7 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm.
0 No Warning/Alarm.
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is within tolerance
limits).
0 Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside tolerance limits).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).
0 Drive control location: LOCAL.
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Actual frequency or speed value equals or is greater than supervision limit
(par. 32.02). Valid in both rotation directions regardless of value of par. 32.02.
0 Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External Control Location EXT2 selected.
0 External Control Location EXT1 selected.
12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received.
0 No External Run Enable received.
13, 14 Reserved
15 1 Communication error detected by fieldbus adapter module (on fibre optic
channel CH0).
0 Fieldbus adapter (CH0) communication OK.
Fieldbus control
209
Figure 2 State Machine for the ABB Drives communication profile.
MAINS OFF
Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED
(SW Bit6=1)
NOT READY
TO SWITCH ON
(SW Bit0=0)
READY TO
SWITCH ON
from any state
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
ABB Drives
Communication
Profile
READY TO
OPERATE
(SW Bit1=1)
n(f)=0 / I=0
OPERATION
INHIBITED
(SW Bit2=0)
A B C D
(CW Bit3=0)
operation
inhibited
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
OFF1
ACTIVE
(SW Bit1=0)
(SW Bit0=1)
(CW Bit3=1
and
SW Bit12=1)
C D
(CW Bit5=0)
OPERATION
ENABLED
(SW Bit2=1)
(SW Bit5=0)
from any state from any state
Emergency Stop
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0)
n(f)=0 / I=0
OFF3
ACTIVE
Emergency OFF
OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
(SW Bit4=0)
OFF2
ACTIVE
RFG: OUTPUT
ENABLED
RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED
OPERATING
B
B C D
(CW Bit4=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
D
(CW Bit6=0)
A
C
(CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
CW = Control Word
SW = Status Word
n = Speed
I = Input Current
(SW Bit8=1)
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
f = Frequency
D
from any state
Fault
(SW Bit3=1)
FAULT
(CW Bit7=1)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111
and SW Bit12=1)
Fieldbus control
210
Fieldbus reference scaling
With the ABB Drives communication profile active, fieldbus references REF1 and
REF2 are scaled as shown in the table below.
Note: Any correction of the reference (see above) is applied before scaling.
Ref.
No.
Application
Macro Used
(par. 99.02)
Range Reference Type Scaling Notes
REF1 (any) -32768 ...
32767
Speed or Frequency
(not with
FAST COMM)
-20000 = -[par. 11.05]
-1 = -[par. 11.04]
0 = [par. 11.04]
20000 = [par. 11.05]
Final reference limited by
20.01/20.02 [speed] or
20.07/20.08 [frequency].
Speed or Frequency
with FAST COMM
-20000 = -[par. 11.05]
0 = 0
20000 = [par. 11.05]
20.01/20.02 [speed] or
20.07/20.08 [frequency].
REF2 FACTORY,
HAND/AUTO,
or SEQ CTRL
-32768 ...
32767
Speed or Freq. (not
with FAST COMM)
-20000 = -[par. 11.08]
-1 = -[par. 11.07]
0 = [par. 11.07]
20000 = [par. 11.08]
20.01/20.02 [speed] or
20.07/20.08 [frequency].
Speed or Freq. with
FAST COMM
-20000 = -[par. 11.08]
0 = 0
20000 = [par. 11.08]
20.01/20.02 [speed] or
20.07/20.08 [frequency].
T CTRL or
M/F (optional)
-32768 ...
32767
Torque (not with
FAST COMM)
-10000 = -[par. 11.08]
-1 = -[par. 11.07]
0 = [par. 11.07]
10000 = [par. 11.08]
par. 20.04.
Torque with
FAST COMM
-10000 = -[par. 11.08]
0 = 0
10000 = [par. 11.08]
par. 20.04.
PID CTRL -32768 ...
32767
PID Reference
(not with
FAST COMM)
-10000 = -[par. 11.08]
-1 = -[par. 11.07]
0 = [par. 11.07]
10000 = [par. 11.08]
PID Reference with
FAST COMM
-10000 = -[par. 11.08]
0 = 0
10000 = [par. 11.08]
Fieldbus control
211
Generic Drive communication profile
The Generic Drive communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
GENERIC. The Generic Drive profile realises the device profile for drives speed
control only as defined by specific fieldbus standards such as PROFIDRIVE for
PROFIBUS, DriveCom for InterBus-S, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet, Drives and
Motion Control for CANopen, etc. Each device profile specifies its Control and Status
Words, Reference and Actual value scaling. The profiles also define Mandatory
services which are transferred to the application interface of the drive in a
standardised way.
The Control Word commands are effective when par. 10.01 is set to COMM.CW (or
when par. 10.07 is set to 1).
Note 1: The Generic Drive communication profile requires the use of EXT1 as the
active control location.
Note 2: The Generic Drive profile is only available with type Rxxx fieldbus adapter
modules.
Table 7 Drive commands supported by the Generic Drive communication profile.
Name Description
STOP The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed according to the active deceleration ramp
(parameter 22.03 or 22.05).
START The drive accelerates to the set reference value according to the active acceleration ramp (par.
22.02 or 22.04). The direction of rotation is determined by the sign of the reference value and the
setting of par. 10.03.
COAST STOP The drive coasts to stop, i.e. the drive stops modulating. However, this command can be
overridden by the Brake Control function, which forces the drive to decelerate to zero speed by
the active deceleration ramp.
QUICK STOP The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed within the emergency stop deceleration time
defined by par. 22.07.
CURRENT LIMIT
STOP (CLS)
The drive decelerates the motor to zero speed according to the set current limit (par. 20.03) or
torque limit (20.04), whichever is first reached. The same procedure is valid in case of a Voltage
Limit Stop (VLS).
INCHING1 With this command active, the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 12 (defined by par.
12.13). After the command is removed, the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed.
Note: The speed reference ramps are not effective. The speed change rate is only limited by the
current (or torque) limit of the drive.
Note: Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2.
Note: Not effective in Scalar control mode.
INCHING2 With this command active, the drive accelerates the motor to Constant Speed 13 (defined by par.
12.14). After the command is removed, the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed.
Note: The speed reference ramps are not effective. The speed change rate is only limited by the
current (or torque) limit of the drive.
Note: Inching 1 takes priority over Inching 2.
Note: Not effective in Scalar control mode.
RAMP OUT ZERO When active, forces the output of the reference function generator to zero.
RAMP HOLD When active, freezes the reference function generator output.
FORCED TRIP Trips the drive. The drive will indicate a fault FORCED TRIP.
RESET Resets an active fault.
Fieldbus control
212
Speed reference and actual speed scaling
Both the nominal speed reference value given via the fieldbus interface and the
actual speed value received from the drive are related to the motor nominal speed
(DTC motor control mode) or motor nominal frequency (Scalar motor control mode)
as follows:
Motor control
mode
Speed reference/Actual speed
scaling
Notes
DTC 0% = 0 rpm
100% = [par. 99.08] rpm
The filter time of the actual
speed value can be adjusted
using par. 34.04.
Scalar 0% = 0 Hz
100% = [par. 99.07] Hz
Fieldbus control
213
CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile
The CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile is active when parameter 98.07 is set to
CSA 2.8/3.0. The Control Word and Status Word for the profile are described below.
Table 8 Control Word for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile.
Table 9 Status Word for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile.
Bit Name Value Description
0 Reserved
1 ENABLE 1 Enabled
0 Coast to stop
2 Reserved
3 START/STOP 0 1 Start
0 Stop according to parameter 21.03 STOP FUNCTION
4 Reserved
5 CNTRL_MODE 1 Select control mode 2
0 Select control mode 1
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 RESET_FAULT 0 1 Reset drive fault
9 15 Reserved
Bit Name Value Description
0 READY 1 Ready to start
0 Initialising, or initialising error
1 ENABLE 1 Enabled
0 Coast to stop
2 Reserved
3 RUNNING 1 Running with selected reference
0 Stopped
4 Reserved
5 REMOTE 1 Drive in Remote mode
0 Drive in Local mode
6 Reserved
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive at reference
0 Drive not at reference
8 FAULTED 1 A fault is active
0 No active faults
9 WARNING 1 A warning is active
0 No active warnings
10 LIMIT 1 Drive at a limit
0 Drive at no limit
11 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
214
Diverse status, fault, alarm and limit words
Table 10 The Auxiliary Status Word (Actual Signal 3.03).
Bit Name Description
0 Reserved
1 OUT OF WINDOW Speed difference is out of the window (in speed
control)*.
2 Reserved
3 MAGNETIZED Flux has been formed in the motor.
4 Reserved
5 SYNC RDY Position counter synchronised.
6 1 START NOT
DONE
Drive has not been started after changing the motor
parameters in group 99.
7 IDENTIF RUN
DONE
Motor ID Run successfully completed.
8 START INHIBITION Prevention of unexpected start-up active.
9 LIMITING Control at a limit. See actual signal 3.04 LIMIT
WORD 1 below.
10 TORQ CONTROL Torque reference is followed*.
11 ZERO SPEED Absolute value of motor actual speed is below zero
speed limit (4% of synchronous speed).
12 INTERNAL SPEED
FB
Internal speed feedback followed.
13 M/F COMM ERR Master/Follower link (on CH2) communication
error*.
14 15 Reserved
*See Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFY 58962180 [English]).
Fieldbus control
215
Table 11 Limit Word 1 (Actual Signal 3.04).
Table 12 Fault Word 1 (Actual Signal 3.05).
Bit Name Active Limit
0 TORQ MOTOR LIM Pull-out limit.
1 SPD_TOR_MIN_LIM Speed control torque min. limit.
2 SPD_TOR_MAX_LIM Speed control torque max. limit.
3 TORQ_USER_CUR_LIM User-defined current limit.
4 TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM Internal current limit.
5 TORQ_MIN_LIM Any torque min. limit.
6 TORQ_MAX_LIM Any torque max. limit.
7 TREF_TORQ_MIN_LIM Torque reference min. limit.
8 TREF_TORQ_MAX_LIM Torque reference max. limit.
9 FLUX_MIN_LIM Flux reference min. limit.
10 FREQ_MIN_LIMIT Speed/Frequency min. limit.
11 FREQ_MAX_LIMIT Speed/Frequency max. limit.
12 DC_UNDERVOLT DC undervoltage limit.
13 DC_OVERVOLT DC overvoltage limit.
14 TORQUE LIMIT Any torque limit.
15 FREQ_LIMIT Any speed/frequency limit.
0 SHORT CIRC For the possible causes and remedies, see the
chapter Fault tracing.
1 OVERCURRENT
2 DC OVERVOLT
3 ACS 800 TEMP
4 EARTH FAULT
5 THERMISTOR
6 MOTOR TEMP
7 SYSTEM_FAULT A fault is indicated by the System Fault Word
(Actual Signal 3.07).
8 UNDERLOAD For the possible causes and remedies, see the
9 OVERFREQ
10 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
216
Table 13 Fault Word 2 (Actual Signal 3.06).
0 SUPPLY PHASE For the possible causes and remedies, see
the chapter Fault tracing.
1 NO MOT DATA
2 DC UNDERVOLT
3 Reserved
4 RUN DISABLED For the possible causes and remedies, see
5 ENCODER FLT
6 I/O COMM
7 CTRL B TEMP (4100)
8 EXTERNAL FLT
9 OVER SWFREQ Switching overfrequency fault.
10 AI < MIN FUNC For the possible causes and remedies, see
11 PPCC LINK
12 COMM MODULE
13 PANEL LOSS
14 MOTOR STALL
15 MOTOR PHASE
Fieldbus control
217
Table 14 The System Fault Word (Actual Signal 3.07).
0 FLT (F1_7) Factory default parameter file error.
1 USER MACRO User Macro file error.
2 FLT (F1_4) FPROM operating error.
3 FLT (F1_5) FPROM data error.
4 FLT (F2_12) Internal time level 2 overflow.
8 FLT (F2_16) State machine overflow.
9 FLT (F2_17) Application program execution error.
10 FLT (F2_18) Application program execution error.
11 FLT (F2_19) Illegal instruction.
12 FLT (F2_3) Register stack overflow.
13 FLT (F2_1) System stack overflow.
14 FLT (F2_0) System stack underflow.
15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
218
Table 15 Alarm Word 1 (Actual Signal 3.08).
Table 16 Alarm Word 2 (Actual Signal 3.09).
0 START INHIBIT For the possible causes and remedies, see
1 Reserved
2 THERMISTOR For the possible causes and remedies, see
3 MOTOR TEMP
4 ACS 800 TEMP
5 ENCODER ERR
6 T MEAS ALM
7 11 Reserved
12 COMM MODULE For the possible causes and remedies, see
13 Reserved
14 EARTH FAULT For the possible causes and remedies, see
15 Reserved
0 Reserved
1 UNDERLOAD (ff6A) For the possible causes and remedies, see the
2, 3 Reserved
4 ENCODER For the possible causes and remedies, see the
5, 6 Reserved
7 POWFAIL FILE Error in restoring POWERFAIL.DDF.
8 ALM (OS_17) Error in restoring POWERDOWN.DDF.
9 MOTOR STALL (7121) For the possible causes and remedies, see the
10 AI < MIN FUNC (8110)
11, 12 Reserved
13 PANEL LOSS (5300) For the possible causes and remedies, see the
14, 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
219
Table 17 The INT Fault Info Word (Actual Signal 3.12). The Word includes
information on the location of faults PPCC LINK, OVERCURRENT, EARTH FAULT
and SHORT CIRCUIT (see Table 12 Fault Word 1, Table 13 Fault Word 2, and the
* In use only with parallel inverters. INT 0 is connected to PBU CH1, INT 1 to CH2 etc.
0 INT 1 FLT INT 1 board fault*
1 INT 2 FLT INT 2 board fault *
4 PBU FLT PBU board fault *
5 - Not in use
6 U-PH SC U Phase U upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
7 U-PH SC L Phase U lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
8 V-PH SC U Phase V upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
9 V-PH SC L Phase V lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
10 W-PH SC U Phase W upper-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
11 W-PH SC L Phase W lower-leg IGBT(s) short circuit
12 ... 15 Not in use
U V W
INT
Upper-leg IGBTs
Lower-leg IGBTs
Inverter Block Diagram
U V W
INT
U V W
INT
U V W
INT
...
PBU
1 2 3
Inverter Unit Block Diagram (two to four parallel Inverters)
CH1 CH2
CH3
RMIO Motor Control and I/O Board
INT Main Circuit Interface Board
PBU PPCS Link Branching Unit
RMIO
RMIO
Fieldbus control
220
Table 18 Auxiliary Status Word 3 (Actual Signal 3.13)
Table 19 Auxiliary Status Word 4 (Actual Signal 3.14)
0 REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction.
1 EXT CTRL External control is selected.
2 REF 2 SEL Reference 2 is selected.
3 CONST SPEED A Constant Speed (115) is selected.
4 STARTED The drive has received a Start command.
5 USER 2 SEL User Macro 2 has been loaded.
6 OPEN BRAKE The Open Brake command is ON. See group 42 BRAKE
CONTROL.
7 LOSS OF REF The reference has been lost.
8 STOP DI STATUS The state of the interlock input on the RMIO board.
9 15 Reserved
0 SPEED 1 LIM Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision
limit 1. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
1 SPEED 2 LIM Output speed has exceeded or fallen below supervision
limit 2. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
2 CURRENT LIM Motor current has exceeded or fallen below the set
supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
3 REF 1 LIM Reference 1 has exceeded or fallen below the set
4 REF 2 LIM Reference 2 has exceeded or fallen below the set
5 TORQUE 1 LIM The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the
TORQUE1 supervision limit. See group 32
SUPERVISION.
6 TORQUE 2 LIM The motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the
TORQUE2 supervision limit. See group 32
SUPERVISION.
7 ACT 1 LIM PID controller actual value 1 has exceeded or fallen below
the set supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
8 ACT 2 LIM PID controller actual value 2 has exceeded or fallen below
the set supervision limit. See group 32 SUPERVISION.
9 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
221
Table 20 Fault Word 4 (Actual Signal 3.15)
Table 21 Alarm Word 4 (Actual Signal 3.16)
Table 22 Fault Word 5 (Actual Signal 3.17)
Table 23 Alarm Word 5 (Actual Signal 3.18)
0 Reserved
1 MOTOR 1 TEMP For the possible causes and remedies, see
2 MOTOR 2 TEMP
3 BRAKE ACKN
4 15 Reserved
0 Reserved
1 MOTOR 1 TEMP For the possible causes and remedies, see
2 MOTOR 2 TEMP
3 BRAKE ACKN
4 SLEEP MODE
5 15 Reserved
0 BR BROKEN For the possible causes and remedies, see
1 BR WIRING
2 BC SHORT CIR
3 BR OVERHEAT
4 15 Reserved
0 REPLACE FAN For the possible causes and remedies, see
1 SYNCRO SPEED
2 BR OVERHEAT
3 Reserved
4 IN CHOKE TEMP For the possible causes and remedies, see
5 15 Reserved
Fieldbus control
222
223
Chapter overview
The chapter describes the use of analogue extension module RAIO as an speed
reference interface of ACS800 equipped with Standard Application Program.
Speed control through the analogue extension module
Two variants are described:
Bipolar Input in Basic Speed Control
Bipolar Input in Joystick Mode
Only the use of a bipolar input ( signal range) is covered here. The use of unipolar
input corresponds to that of a standard unipolar input when:
the settings described below are done, and
the communication between the module and the drive is activated by parameter
98.06.
Basic checks
Ensure the drive is:
installed and commissioned, and
the external start and stop signals are connected.
Ensure the extension module:
settings are adjusted. (See below.)
is installed and reference signal is connected to AI1.
is connected to the drive.
Settings of the analogue extension module and the drive
Set the module node address to 5 (not required if installed to the option slot of the
drive).
Select the signal type for the module input AI1 (switch).
Select the operation mode (unipolar/bipolar) of the module input (switch).
Ensure the drive parameter settings correspond to the mode of the module inputs
(parameter 98.13 and 98.14).
Set the drive parameters (see the appropriate subsection on the following pages).
224
Parameter settings: bipolar input in basic speed control
The table below lists the parameters that affect the handling of the speed reference
received through the extension module bipolar input AI1 (AI5 of the drive).
The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input AI1 of
the extension module .
1)
For the negative speed range, the drive must receive a separate reverse command.
2)
Set if supervision of living zero is used.
Parameter Setting
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE RAIO-SLOT1
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC BIPO AI5
10.03 DIRECTION FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST
(1
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT1
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI5
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM minREF1
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM maxREF1
13.16 MINIMUM AI5 minAI5
13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 maxAI5
13.18 SCALE AI5 100%
13.20 INVERT AI5 NO
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION
(2
S
p
e
e
d

R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
scaled
minREF1
-minREF1
-scaled
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST
1)
Operation Range
maxAI5 = 13.17 MAXIMUM AI5
maxREF1
maxREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST
1)
225
Parameter settings: bipolar input in joystick mode
The table below lists the parameters that affect the handling of the speed and
direction reference received through the extension module bipolar input AI1 (AI5 of
the drive).
The figure below presents the speed reference corresponding to bipolar input AI1 of
the extension module in joystick mode.
1)
Enables the use of both positive and negative speed range.
2)
Set if supervision of living zero is used.
Parameter Setting
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE RAIO-SLOT1
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC BIPO AI5
10.03 DIRECTION FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST
(1
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT1
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI5/JOYST
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM minREF1
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM maxREF1
13.16 MINIMUM AI5 minAI5
13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 maxAI5
13.18 SCALE AI5 100%
13.20 INVERT AI5 NO
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION
(2
S
p
e
e
d

R
e
f
e
r
e
n
c
e
maxAI5 = 13.17 MAXIMUM AI5
scaled
minREF1
-minREF1
-scaled
Operation Range
maxREF1
maxREF1
10.03 DIRECTION =
FORWARD or
REQUEST
1)
10.03 DIRECTION =
REVERSE or
REQUEST
1)
226
227
Chapter overview
This chapter lists the actual signal and parameter lists with some additional data. For
the descriptions, see chapter Actual signals and parameters.
Terms and abbreviations
Fieldbus addresses
Profibus
See the tables below.
Modbus and Modbus Plus address
4xxyy, where xxyy = drive parameter number
Interbus-S address
xxyy 100 + 12288 converted into hexadecimal
xxyy = drive parameter number
Example: The index for drive parameter 13.09 is 1309 + 12288 = 13597 = 351D.
Term Definition
PB Parameter address for the fieldbus communication through a
Profibus link (Add 4000 in FMS Mode).
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on
the panel and the integer used in serial communication.
Absolute Maximum Frequency Value of 20.08, or 20.07 if the absolute value of the minimum limit
is greater than the maximum limit.
Absolute Maximum Speed Value of parameter 20.02, or 20.01 if the absolute value of the
minimum limit is higher than the maximum limit.
228
Actual signals
Index Name Short name FbEq Unit Range PB
01 ACTUAL SIGNALS
01.01 PROCESS VARIABLE PROC VAR 1 = 1 According to
parameter 34.02
1
01.02 SPEED SPEED -2000 = -100% 2000
= 100% of motor
absolute max. speed
rpm 2
01.03 FREQUENCY FREQ -100 = -1 Hz 100 = 1
Hz
Hz 3
01.04 CURRENT CURRENT 10 = 1 A A 4
01.05 TORQUE TORQUE -10000 = -100%
10000 = 100% of
motor nominal torque
% 5
01.06 POWER POWER 0 = 0% 1000 = 100%
of motor nominal
power
% 6
01.07 DC BUS VOLTAGE V DC BUS V 1 = 1 V V 7
01.08 MAINS VOLTAGE MAINS V 1 = 1 V V 8
01.09 OUTPUT VOLTAGE OUT VOLT 1 = 1 V V 9
01.10 ACS 800 TEMP ACS TEMP 1 = 1 C C 10
01.11 EXTERNAL REF 1 EXT REF1 1 = 1 rpm rpm 11
01.12 EXTERNAL REF 2 EXT REF2 0 = 0% 10000 =
100% 1)
% 12
01.13 CTRL LOCATION CTRL LOC (1,2) LOCAL; (3)
EXT1; (4) EXT2
LOCAL; EXT1; EXT2 13
01.14 OP HOUR COUNTER OP HOURS 1 = 1 h h 14
01.15 KILOWATT HOURS KW HOURS 1 = 100 kWh kWh 15
01.16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT APPL OUT 0 = 0% 10000 =
100%
% 16
01.17 DI6-1 STATUS DI6-1 17
01.18 AI1 [V] AI1 [V] 1 = 0.001 V V 18
01.19 AI2 [mA] AI2 [mA] 1 =0.001 mA mA 19
01.20 AI3 [mA] AI3 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 20
01.21 RO3-1 STATUS RO3-1 21
01.22 AO1 [mA] AO1 [mA] 1 =0.001 mA mA 22
01.23 AO2 [mA] AO2 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 23
01.24 ACTUAL VALUE 1 ACT VAL1 0 = 0% 10000 =
100%
% 24
01.25 ACTUAL VALUE 2 ACT VAL2 0 = 0% 10000 =
100%
% 25
01.26 CONTROL DEVIATION CONT DEV -10000 = -100%
10000 = 100%
% 26
01.27 APPLICATION MACRO MACRO 1 7 According to
parameter 99.02
27
01.28 EXT AO1 [mA] EXT AO1 1 = 0.001 mA mA 28
01.29 EXT AO2 [mA] EXT AO2 1 = 0.001 mA mA 29
01.30 PP 1 TEMP PP 1 TEM 1 = 1 C C 30
01.31 PP 2 TEMP PP 2 TEM 1 = 1 C C 31
01.32 PP 3 TEMP PP 3 TEM 1 = 1 C C 32
01.33 PP 4 TEMP PP 4 TEM 1 = 1 C C 33
01.34 ACTUAL VALUE ACT V 0 = 0% 10000 =
100%
% 34
01.35 MOTOR 1 TEMP M 1 TEMP 1 = 1 C C 35
01.36 MOTOR 2 TEMP M 2 TEMP 1 = 1 C C 36
01.37 MOTOR TEMP EST MOTOR TE 1 = 1 C C 37
01.38 AI5 [mA] AI5 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 38
01.39 AI6 [mA] AI6 [mA] 1 = 0.001 mA mA 39
229
01.40 DI7-12 STATUS DI7..12 1 = 1 40
01.41 EXT RO STATUS EXT RO 1 = 1 41
01.42 PROCESS SPEED REL P SPEED 1 = 1 % 42
01.43 MOTOR RUN TIME MOTOR RUN TIME 1 = 10 h h 43
01.44 FAN ON-TIME FAN TIME 1 = 10 h h 44
01.45 CTRL BOARD TEMP CTRL B T 1 = 1 C C 45
02 ACTUAL SIGNALS
02.01 SPEED REF 2 S REF 2 0 = 0% 20000 =
100% of motor
absolute max. speed
rpm 51
02.02 SPEED REF 3 S REF 3 rpm 52
02.09 TORQ REF 2 T REF 2 0 = 0% 10000 =
100% of motor
nominal torque
% 59
02.10 TORQ REF 3 T REF 3 % 60
02.13 TORQ USED REF T USED R % 63
02.14 FLUX REF FLUX REF 0 = 0% 10000 =
100%
% 64
02.17 SPEED ESTIMATED SPEED ES 0 = 0% 20000 =
100% of motor
absolute max. speed
rpm 67
02.18 SPEED MEASURED SPEED ME rpm 68
03 ACTUAL SIGNALS 2)
03.01 MAIN CTRL WORD MAIN CW 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 76
03.02 MAIN STATUS WORD MAIN SW 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 77
03.03 AUX STATUS WORD AUX SW 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 78
03.04 LIMIT WORD 1 LIMIT W1 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 79
03.05 FAULT WORD 1 FAULT W1 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 80
03.07 SYSTEM FAULT SYS FLT 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 82
03.08 ALARM WORD 1 ALARM W1 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 83
03.11 FOLLOWER MCW FOLL MCW 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 86
03.12 INT FAULT INFO INT FAUL 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 87
03.13 AUX STATUS WORD 3 AUX SW 3 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 88
03.14 AUX STATUS WORD 4 AUX SW 4 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 89
3.20 LATEST FAULT LAST FLT 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 94
3.21 2.LATEST FAULT 2.FAULT 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 95
3.25 LATEST WARNING LAST WRN 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 99
3.26 2.LATEST WARNING 2.WARN 0 ... 65535 (Decimal)
09 ACTUAL SIGNALS
09.01 AI1 SCALED AI1 SCAL 20000 = 10 v 0 20000 -
09.02 AI2 SCALED AI2 SCAL 20000 = 20 mA 0 20000 -
09.06 DS MCW DS MCW 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) 0 ... 65535 (Decimal) -
09.07 MASTER REF1 M REF1 -32768 32767 -32768 32767 -
09.08 MASTER REF2 M REF2 -32768 32767 -32768 32767 -
09.09 AUX DS VAL1 AUX DSV1 -32768 32767 -32768 32767 -
09.10 AUX DS VAL2 AUX DSV2 -32768 32767 -32768 32767 -
09.11 AUX DS VAL3 AUX DSV3 -32768 32767 -32768 32767 -
Index Name Short name FbEq Unit Range PB
230
1) Percent of motor max. speed / nominal torque / max. process reference (depending on the ACS800
macro selected).
2) The contents of these data words are detailed in the chapter Fieldbus control. For the contents of
Actual Signal 3.11, see the Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFE 64590430 [English]).
Parameters
Index Name/Selection FACTORY HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL T-CTRL SEQ CTRL PB
10 START/STOP/DIR
10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2 DI1,2 DI1 DI1,2 DI1,2 101
10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR NOT SEL DI6,5 DI6 DI1,2 NOT SEL 102
10.03 DIRECTION FORWARD REQUEST FORWARD REQUEST REQUEST 103
10.04 EXT 1 STRT PTR 0 0 0 0 104
10.05 EXT 2 STRT PTR 0 0 0 0 0 105
10.06 JOG SPEED SELECT NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 106
10.07 NET CONTROL 0 0 0 0 0 107
10.08 NET REFERENCE 0 0 0 0 0 108
11 REFERENCE SELECT
11.01 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) 126
11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT1 DI3 DI3 DI3 EXT1 127
11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 128
11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 129
11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 130
11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT KEYPAD AI2 AI1 AI2 AI1 131
11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 132
11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 133
11.09 EXT 1/2 SEL PTR 0 0 0 0 0 134
11.10 EXT 1 REF PTR 0 0 0 0 0 135
11.11 EXT 2 REF PTR 0 0 0 0 0 136
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS
12.01 CONST SPEED SEL DI5,6 DI4(SPEED4) DI4(SPEED4) DI4(SPEED4) DI4,5,6 151
12.02 CONST SPEED 1 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 152
13 ANALOGUE INPUTS
13.01 MINIMUM AI1 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V 176
13.02 MAXIMUM AI1 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 177
13.03 SCALE AI1 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 178
13.04 FILTER AI1 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 179
13.05 INVERT AI1 NO NO NO NO NO 180
13.06 MINIMUM AI2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 181
13.07 MAXIMUM AI2 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 182
13.08 SCALE AI2 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 183
13.09 FILTER AI2 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 184
231
13.13 SCALE AI3 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 188
13.14 FILTER AI3 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 189
13.18 SCALE AI5 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 193
13.19 FILTER AI5 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 194
13.23 SCALE AI6 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 198
13.24 FILTER AI6 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 199
14 RELAY OUTPUTS
14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT READY READY READY READY READY 201
14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING 202
14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) 203
14.04 RO1 TON DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 204
14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 205
14.10 DIO MOD1 RO1 READY READY READY READY READY 210
14.11 DIO MOD1 RO2 RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING 211
14.12 DIO MOD2 RO1 FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 212
14.13 DIO MOD2 RO2 WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 213
14.14 DIO MOD3 RO1 REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL 214
14.15 DIO MOD3 RO2 AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED 215
14.16 RO PTR1 0 0 0 0 0 216
14.17 RO PTR2 0 0 0 0 0 217
14.18 RO PTR3 0 0 0 0 0 218
14.19 RO PTR4 0 0 0 0 0 219
14.20 RO PTR5 0 0 0 0 0 220
14.21 RO PTR6 0 0 0 0 0 221
14.22 RO PTR7 0 0 0 0 0 222
14.23 RO PTR8 0 0 0 0 0 223
14.24 RO PTR9 0 0 0 0 0 224
15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED 226
15.02 INVERT AO1 NO NO NO NO NO 227
15.03 MINIMUM AO1 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 228
15.04 FILTER AO1 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 229
15.05 SCALE AO1 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 230
15.06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT2 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 231
15.07 INVERT AO2 NO NO NO NO NO 232
15.08 MINIMUM AO2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 233
15.09 FILTER AO2 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 234
15.10 SCALE AO2 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 235
15.11 AO1 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 236
15.12 AO2 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 237
16 SYSTEM CTRL INPUTS
16.01 RUN ENABLE YES YES DI5 DI6 YES 251
16.02 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN 252
16.03 PASS CODE 0 0 0 0 0 253
16.04 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 254
16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 255
232
16.06 LOCAL LOCK OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 256
16.07 PARAMETER SAVE DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE 257
16.08 RUN ENA PTR 0 0 0 0 0 258
16.09 CTRL BOARD SUPPLY INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL 259
20 LIMITS
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) 351
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) 352
20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT type specific type specific type specific type specific type specific 353
20.04 TORQ MAX LIM1 300% 300% 300% 300% 300% 354
20.05 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL ON ON ON ON ON 355
20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL ON ON ON ON ON 356
20.07 MINIMUM FREQ - 50 Hz - 50 Hz - 50 Hz - 50 Hz - 50 Hz 357
20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 358
20.11 P MOTORING LIM 300% 300% 300% 300% 300% 361
20.12 P GENERATING LIM -300% -300% -300% -300% -300% 362
20.13 MIN TORQ SEL NEG MAX
TORQ
NEG MAX
TORQ
NEG MAX
TORQ
NEG MAX
TORQ
NEG MAX
TORQ
363
20.14 MAX TORQ SEL MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 MAX LIM1 364
20.15 TORQ MIN LIM1 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 365
20.16 TORQ MIN LIM2 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 366
20.17 TORQ MAX LIM2 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 367
20.18 TORQ MIN PTR 0 0 0 0 0 368
20.19 TORQ MAX PTR 0 0 0 0 0 369
20.20 MIN AI SCALE 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 370
20.21 MAX AI SCALE 300% 300% 300% 300% 300% 371
21 START/STOP
21.01 START FUNCTION AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO 376
21.02 CONST MAGN TIME 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 377
21.03 STOP FUNCTION COAST COAST COAST COAST RAMP 378
21.04 DC HOLD NO NO NO NO NO 379
21.05 DC HOLD SPEED 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm 380
21.06 DC HOLD CURR 30% 30% 30% 30% 30% 381
21.07 RUN ENABLE FUNC COAST STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP COAST STOP 382
21.08 SCALAR FLY START NO NO NO NO NO 383
21.09 START INTRL FUNC OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP OFF2 STOP 384
21.10 ZERO SPEED DELAY 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 385
22 ACCEL/DECEL
22.01 ACC/DEC SEL DI4 ACC/DEC 1 ACC/DEC 1 DI5 DI3 401
22.02 ACCEL TIME 1 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 402
22.03 DECEL TIME 1 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 403
22.04 ACCEL TIME 2 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 404
22.05 DECEL TIME 2 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 405
22.06 ACC/DEC RAMP SHPE 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 406
22.07 EM STOP RAMP TIME 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 407
22.08 ACC PTR 0 0 0 0 0 408
22.09 DEC PTR 0 0 0 0 0 409
23 SPEED CTRL
23.01 GAIN 10 10 10 10 10 426
23.02 INTEGRATION TIME 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 427
23.03 DERIVATION TIME 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 428
23.04 ACC COMPENSATION 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.12 s 429
23.05 SLIP GAIN 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 430
23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN NO NO NO NO NO 431
24 TORQUE CTRL
24.01 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00 s 451
24.02 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00 s 452
233
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS
25.01 CRIT SPEED SELECT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 476
25.02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 477
25.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 478
26 MOTOR CONTROL
26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION NO NO NO NO NO 501
26.02 FLUX BRAKING YES YES YES YES YES 502
26.03 IR COMPENSATION 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 503
26.05 HEX FIELD WEAKEN NO NO NO NO NO 504
26.06 FLUX REF PTR 0 0 0 0 0 506
27 BRAKE CHOPPER
27.01 BRAKE CHOPPER CTL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
27.02 BR OVERLOAD FUNC NO NO NO NO NO
27.03 BR RESISTANCE
27.04 BR THERM TCONST 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s
27.05 MAX CONT BR POWER 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW
27.06 BC CTRL MODE AS GENERATOR AS GENERATOR AS GENERATOR AS GENERATOR AS GENERATOR
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS
30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 601
30.02 PANEL LOSS FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 602
30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 603
30.04 MOTOR THERM PROT NO NO NO NO NO 604
30.05 MOT THERM P MODE DTC/USER
MODE
DTC/USER
MODE
DTC/USER
MODE
DTC/USER
MODE
DTC/USER
MODE
605
30.06 MOTOR THERM TIME (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) 606
30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 607
30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD 74.0% 74.0% 74.0% 74.0% 74.0% 608
30.09 BREAK POINT 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 609
30.10 STALL FUNCTION FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 610
30.11 STALL FREQ HI 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 611
30.12 STALL TIME 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s 612
30.13 UNDERLOAD FUNC NO NO NO NO NO 613
30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s 614
30.15 UNDERLOAD CURVE 1 1 1 1 1 615
30.16 MOTOR PHASE LOSS NO NO NO NO NO 616
30.17 EARTH FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 617
30.18 COMM FLT FUNC FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 618
30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 619
30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO 620
30.21 AUX DS T-OUT 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 621
30.22 IO CONFIG FUNC WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 622
31 AUTOMATIC RESET
31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0 0 0 0 0 626
31.02 TRIAL TIME 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 627
31.03 DELAY TIME 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 628
31.04 OVERCURRENT NO NO NO NO NO 629
31.05 OVERVOLTAGE NO NO NO NO NO 630
31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE NO NO NO NO 631
31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN NO NO NO NO NO 632
32 SUPERVISION
32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 651
32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 652
32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 653
32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 654
234
32.05 CURRENT FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 655
32.06 CURRENT LIMIT 0 0 0 0 0 656
32.07 TORQUE 1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 657
32.08 TORQUE 1 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 658
32.09 TORQUE 2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 659
32.10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 660
32.11 REF1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 661
32.12 REF1 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 662
32.13 REF2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 663
32.14 REF2 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 664
32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 665
32.16 ACT1 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 666
32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO 667
32.18 ACT2 LIMIT 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 668
33 INFORMATION
33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) 676
33.02 APPL SW VERSION (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) 677
33.03 TEST DATE (Date) (Date) (Date) (Date) (Date) 678
34 PROCESS VARIABLE
34.01 SCALE 100 100 100 100 100 701
34.02 P VAR UNIT % % % % % 702
34.03 SELECT P VAR 142 142 142 142 142 703
34.04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 704
34.05 TORQ ACT FILT TIM 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 705
34.06 RESET RUN TIME NO NO NO NO NO 706
35 MOT TEMP MEAS
35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE 726
35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L 110 110 110 110 110 727
35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L 130 130 130 130 130 728
35.04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE 729
35.05 MOT 2 TEMP ALM L 110 110 110 110 110 730
35.06 MOT 2 TEMP FLT L 130 130 130 130 130 731
35.07 MOT MOD COMPENSAT YES YES YES YES YES 732
40 PID CONTROL
40.01 PID GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 851
40.02 PID INTEG TIME 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 852
40.03 PID DERIV TIME 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 853
40.04 PID DERIV FILTER 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 854
40.05 ERROR VALUE INV NO NO NO NO NO 855
40.06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 856
40.07 ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 857
40.08 ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 858
40.09 ACT1 MINIMUM 0 0 0 0 0 859
40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 860
40.11 ACT2 MINIMUM 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 861
40.12 ACT2 MAXIMUM 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 862
40.13 PID INTEGRATION ON ON ON ON ON 863
40.14 TRIM MODE OFF OFF OFF OFF 864
40.15 TRIM REF SEL AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 865
40.16 TRIM REFERENCE 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 866
40.17 TRIM RANGE ADJUST 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 867
40.18 TRIM SELECTION SPEED TRIM 868
40.19 ACTUAL FILT TIME 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s 869
40.20 SLEEP SELECTION OFF 870
40.21 SLEEP LEVEL 0.0 rpm 871
40.22 SLEEP DELAY 0.0 s 872
40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL 0% 873
40.24 WAKE UP DELAY 0.0 s 874
235
40.25 ACTUAL1 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 875
40.26 PID MINIMUM -100.0% -100.0% -100.0% -100.0% -100.0% 876
40.27 PID MAXIMUM 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 877
42 BRAKE CONTROL
42.01 BRAKE CTRL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF -
42.02 BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF -
42.03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
42.04 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD 10 rpm 10 rpm 10 rpm 10 rpm 10 rpm -
42.06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT -
42.07 START TORQ REF SEL NO NO NO NO NO -
42.08 START TORQ REF 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% -
42.09 EXTEND RUN T 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
42.10 LOW REF BRK HOLD 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s -
50 ENCODER MODULE
50.01 PULSE NR 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 1001
50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE A --- B --- A --- B --- A --- B --- A --- B --- A --- B --- 1002
50.03 ENCODER FAULT WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING 1003
50.04 ENCODER DELAY 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1004
50.05 ENCODER DDCS
CHANNEL
CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 1 1005
50.06 SPEED FB SEL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL 1006
51 COMM MOD DATA 1026
...
52 STANDARD MODBUS
52.01 STATION NUMBER 1 1 1 1 1 1051
52.02 BAUDRATE 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 1052
52.03 PARITY ODD ODD ODD ODD ODD 1053
60 MASTER/FOLLOWER
60.01 MASTER LINK MODE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE 1195
60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR not visible not visible not visible TORQUE not visible 1196
60.03 WINDOW SEL ON not visible not visible not visible NO not visible 1167
60.04 WINDOW WIDTH POS not visible not visible not visible 0 not visible 1198
60.05 WINDOW WIDTH NEG not visible not visible not visible 0 not visible 1199
60.06 DROOP RATE 0 0 0 0 0 1200
60.07 MASTER SIGNAL 2 202 202 202 202 202 1201
60.08 MASTER SIGNAL 3 213 213 213 213 213 1202
70 DDCS CONTROL
70.01 CHANNEL 0 ADDR 1 1 1 1 1 1375
70.02 CHANNEL 3 ADDR 1 1 1 1 1 1376
70.03 CH1 BAUDRATE 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 1377
70.04 CH0 DDCS HW CONN RING RING RING RING RING 1378
83 ADAPT PROG CTRL
83.01 ADAPT PROG CMD EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT 1609
83.02 EDIT COMMAND NO NO NO NO NO 1610
83.03 EDIT BLOCK 0 0 0 0 0 1611
83.04 TIMELEVEL SEL 100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms 100ms 1612
83.05 PASSCODE 0 0 0 0 0 1613
84 ADAPTIVE PROGRAM
84.01 STATUS 1628
84.02 FAULTED PAR 1629
84.05 BLOCK1 NO NO NO NO NO 1630
84.06 INPUT1 0 0 0 0 0 1631
84.07 INPUT2 0 0 0 0 0 1632
84.08 INPUT3 0 0 0 0 0 1633
84.09 OUTPUT 0 0 0 0 0 1634

1644
236
84.79 OUTPUT 0 0 0 0 0 -
85 USER CONSTANTS
85.01 CONSTANT1 0 0 0 0 0 1645
85.02 CONSTANT2 0 0 0 0 0 1646
85.03 CONSTANT3 0 0 0 0 0 1647
85.04 CONSTANT4 0 0 0 0 0 1648
85.05 CONSTANT5 0 0 0 0 0 1649
85.06 CONSTANT6 0 0 0 0 0 1650
85.07 CONSTANT7 0 0 0 0 0 1651
85.08 CONSTANT8 0 0 0 0 0 1652
85.09 CONSTANT9 0 0 0 0 0 1653
85.10 CONSTANT10 0 0 0 0 0 1654
85.11 STRING1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 MESSAGE1 1655
90 D SET REC ADDR
90.01 AUX DS REF3 0 0 0 0 0 1735
90.02 AUX DS REF4 0 0 0 0 0 1736
90.03 AUX DS REF5 0 0 0 0 0 1737
90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE 1 1 1 1 1 1738
90.05 AUX DS SOURCE 3 3 3 3 3 1739
92 D SET TR ADDR
92.01 MAIN DS STATUS WORD 302 302 302 302 302 1771
92.02 MAIN DS ACT1 102 102 102 102 102 1772
92.03 MAIN DS ACT2 105 105 105 105 105 1773
92.04 AUX DS ACT3 305 305 305 305 305 1774
92.05 AUX DS ACT4 308 308 308 308 308 1775
92.06 AUX DS ACT5 306 306 306 306 306 1776
96 EXTERNAL AO
96.01 EXT AO1 SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED 1843
96.02 INVERT EXT AO1 NO NO NO NO NO 1844
96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 1845
96.04 FILTER EXT AO1 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 1846
96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 1847
96.06 EXT AO2 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 1848
96.07 INVERT EXT AO2 NO NO NO NO NO 1849
96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 1850
96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 1851
96.10 SCALE EXT AO2 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 1852
96.11 EXT AO1 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 1853
96.12 EXT AO2 PTR 0 0 0 0 0 1854
98 OPTION MODULES
98.01 ENCODER MODULE NO NO NO NO NO 1901
98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK NO NO NO NO NO 1902
98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 NO NO NO NO NO 1903
98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE NO NO NO NO NO 1906
98.07 COMM PROFILE ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES 1907
98.09 DI/O EXT1 DI FUNC DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 DI7,8,9 1909
98.10 DI/O EXT2 DI FUNC DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 DI10,11,12 1910
98.11 DI/O EXT3 DI FUNC DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12 1911
98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP NO NO NO NO NO 1912
98.13 AI/O EXT AI1 FUNC UNIP AI5 UNIP AI5 UNIP AI5 UNIP AI5 UNIP AI5 1913
98.14 AI/O EXT AI2 FUNC UNIP AI6 UNIP AI6 UNIP AI6 UNIP AI6 UNIP AI6 1914
237
99 START-UP DATA
99.01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH 1926
99.02 APPLICATION MACRO FACTORY HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL T CTRL SEQ CTRL 1927
99.03 APPLIC RESTORE NO NO NO NO NO 1928
99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC 1929
99.05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V 1930
99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 1931
99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 1932
99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED 1 rpm 1 rpm 1 rpm 1 rpm 1 rpm 1933
99.09 MOTOR NOM POWER 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 1934
99.10 MOTOR ID RUN MODE ID MAGN ID MAGN ID MAGN ID MAGN ID MAGN 1935
99.11 DEVICE NAME 1936
238
239
Chapter overview
Diagram Related
diagrams
Reference control chain, sheet 1
Valid when FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL or T CTRL macro is active (see parameter 99.02).
Continued on
sheet 2
Valid when PID CTRL macro is active (see parameter 99.02).
Continued on
sheet 2
Valid with all macros (see parameter 99.02).
Continued from
sheet 1
Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable Start Interlock
-
Handling of Reset and On/Off
-
240
Reference control chain, sheet 1: FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, SEQ CTRL and
T CTRL macros (continued on the next page )
a
b
c
d
241
continued from the previous page
a
b
c
d
242
Reference control chain sheet 1: PID CTRL macro (continued on the next
page )
a
b
c
243
a
b
c
244
Reference control chain sheet 2: All macros (continued on the next page )
a
b
c
d
245
a
b
c
d
246
Handling of Start, Stop, Run Enable and Start Interlock
247
Handling of Reset and On/Off
248
ABB Oy
AC Drives
P.O. Box 184
FIN-00381 HELSINKI
FINLAND
Telephone +358 10 22 211
Telefax +358 10 22 22681
Internet http://www.abb.com
ABB Inc.
Drives and Power Electronics
16250 West Glendale Drive
New Berlin, WI 53151
USA
Telephone 262 785-3200
800 243-4384
Telefax 262 780-5135
3
A
F
E

6
4
5
2
7
5
9
2

R
E
V

C

/

E
N
E
F
F
E
C
T
I
V
E
:
2
0
.
0
7
.
2
0
0
2

En FW 800StdPrg RevC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

En FW 800StdPrg RevC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

En FW 800StdPrg RevC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACS 800

You might also like